Está en la página 1de 396

Craft Terminal Operators Handbook

Alcatel 9600LSY
STM1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System

9600LSY Rel.1.0

SWP REG. 9600LSY R.1.0

957.207.022 A Ed.04 3DB 02838 AAAA Ed.04


Documentation set for 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0
ANV P/N
Handbook
Factory P/N

3DB 02839 AAAA


9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Technical Handbook
955.203.292 Q

3DB 02840 AAAA


9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Installation Handbook
955.203.302 S

3DB 02841 AAAA


9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Lineup Guide
955.203.312 K

3DB 04165 EAAA


Interference investigation procedure
955.203.374 Z
3DB 02838 AAAA this
9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0
957.207.022 A Handbook

3AL 79186 AAAA


1320CT Version 1.3.x Basic Operators Handbook
957.130.542 E

3AL 71079 AAAA


1330AS Rel.5.0 Operators Handbook
957.130.442 A

3AL 71081 AAAA


ELM Rel.5.0 Operators Handbook
957.130.462 E

When supplied on paper, this handbook is divided by registers, for an easier access to the information
herein contained:

CONTENTS REGISTER
GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION 1
SECTION 2: LHR NE MANAGEMENT 2
SECTION 3: LHR NE MAINTENANCE 3
SECTION 4: SIBDL 4

957.207.022 A Ed.04 3DB 02838 AAAA Ed.04


9600LSY REL.1.0 C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

This handbook is composed by several sections.


At the beginning of each section numbering of pages, chapters, figures and tables restarts from
1.
Cross references (ex. see figure 3 on page 45) are always inside the section where you are,
and are referred to the section pages.
This General Table Of Contents is relevant to the whole handbook. At the beginning of each
section, you can find:
a more detailed Table Of Contents, specific for the section
the List of Figures and Tables, specific for the section.

SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

QUICK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1 DOCUMENT GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.3 Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.4 Handbook structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.5 Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.6 Document history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.7 Acronyms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.8 Glossary of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

SWP DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2 ALCATEL SOFTWARE PRODUCTS AND LICENCES DELIVERED TO THE CUSTOMER . . . 31
2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

04 020722 S402071501 A.FUMAGALLI ITACO C.NAVA ITACO


E.CORRADINI E.CORRADINI
03 020524 S402040401 A.FUMAGALLI ITACO C.NAVA ITACO
E.CORRADINI E.CORRADINI
01A 011109 proposaldraft A.FUMAGALLI ITACO M.CORBETTA ITACO
E.CORRADINI
ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

9600LSY REL.1.0
SWP REG.9600LSY R1.0
C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK

ED 04 GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 1/ 6

6
2.2 Software product list and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.3 Software licence list and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

3 SWP ADDITIONAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


3.1 SWP REG. 9600LSY R.1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4 SYSTEM OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.1 LHR System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.2 LHR system layout and equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.3 ECT and RECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

5 ALLOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND CRAFT TERMINAL SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53


5.1 EquipmentOperator interfaces and local software allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.2 OperatorEquipment Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

6 GENERAL ON SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59


6.1 Common situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.2 Troubleshooting situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
6.3 SW download with MIB reset on the Flash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

7 HARDWARE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

8 SWP INSTALLATION ON A NEW SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65


8.1 PC hardware characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.2 Operator skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.3 Summary of SW installation phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.4 SWP loading in PC WINDOWSNT environment (offline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8.5 SW download toward NE (online mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8.6 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.7 Configuration data definition and save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

9 NEW SWP VERSION INSTALLATION (SAME SWP RELEASE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

10 SWP UPGRADING FROM A PREVIOUS SWP RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
11 ECTEQUIPMENT CONNECTION VIA PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK . . . . 75
11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
11.2 Certified modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
11.3 Connection cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
11.4 Modem setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
11.5 Setting up the connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

12 DOCUMENTATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
12.1 Productreleaseversion handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
12.2 General on Alcatel Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 2/ 6

6
SECTION 2: LHR NE MANAGEMENT
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 DOCUMENT GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.2 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.3 Document structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.4 Document history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2 GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15


2.1 LHR view organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2 Introduction to the LHR menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

3 NE MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.1 NE management states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.2 NE supervision and login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

4 NE MANAGEMENT GENERAL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29


4.1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.2 NE Time management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.3 Set Manager list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

5 COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35


5.1 Overview on Communication and Routing Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.2 Communication and routing views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5.3 Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5.4 OS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.5 NTP Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5.6 LAPD Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.7 Ethernet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.8 Reachable Address Prefixes Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.9 Manual ES Adjacencies table Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

6 EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6.1 Introduction and navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6.2 Set and change or remove board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.3 Board administrative state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.4 Software description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.5 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.6 Show supporting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

7 BOARD VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.2 Board View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

8 PORT VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8.2 Port View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

9 RADIO PROTECTION MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101


9.1 Overall RPS structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

10 WAY SIDE TRAFFIC AND SERVICE CHANNELS PROTECTION MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . 115


10.1 Overall structure of WST and Service Channels protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
10.2 RFCOH Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

ED 04 GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 3/ 6

6
10.3 RFCOH Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
10.4 RFCOH Synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

11 RADIO PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


11.1 ATPC/Power and Threshold Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
11.2 ATPC Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
11.3 Power Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
11.4 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
11.5 Power Setting in Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
11.6 ATPC Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
11.7 Gain Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
11.8 HOP Section Trace Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
11.9 Squelch Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
11.10 Radio Abnormal Condition List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
11.11 Frequency Reuse Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
11.12 Equalization Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
11.13 Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
11.14 V.C.O. State Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
11.15 Power Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
11.16 Power Measurement File Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

12 OVERHEAD MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151


12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12.2 OH Connection overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12.3 Overhead views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
12.4 OH TP creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
12.5 OH Cross Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
12.6 OH TP deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
12.7 OH Phone Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
12.8 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

13 LOOPBACK MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167


13.1 Types of Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.2 Caution: recoverable and unrecoverable loopbacks (with RECT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
13.3 Loopback management starting from Port view menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
13.4 Loopback management starting from Equipment view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

14 EXTERNAL INPUT AND OUTPUT POINT MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183


14.1 Displaying external points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
14.2 External Point configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

15 ALARMS MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189


15.1 Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
15.2 Alarms surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
15.3 Abnormal Condition List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

16 EVENT LOG MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

17 PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199


17.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
17.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
17.3 Display Current Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

17.4 Display History Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209


17.5 PM Threshold Table Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
17.6 PM Threshold Table Modification or Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

ED 04 GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 4/ 6

6
18 SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
18.1 General and descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
18.2 Software Download Manager menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
18.3 Init download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

18.4 Units information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

18.5 MIB management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222


18.6 Restart NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

19 SYSTEM SOFTWARE OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225


19.1 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
19.2 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
19.3 Channels and relation between boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
19.4 Functional partitioning of the management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
19.5 Equipment management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
19.6 Transmission management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
19.7 Radio management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
19.8 Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
19.9 Radio Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
19.10 Overhead management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
19.11 Radio Overhead management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
19.12 Connection management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
19.13 Software management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
19.14 Communication and Routing management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
19.15 Security management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
19.16 Support management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
19.17 Test management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

SECTION 3: LHR NE MAINTENANCE


LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1 DOCUMENT GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Document structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4 Document history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

2 MAINTENANCE INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

3 MAINTENANCE OF THE PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

4 PROBLEMS WITH CRAFT TERMINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5


4.1 Purpose of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
4.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

5 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (TROUBLESHOOTING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7


5.1 Purpose of this procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
5.2 Troubleshooting organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
5.3 Troubleshooting by means of the Craft Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 5/ 6

6
SECTION 4: SIBDL
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


1 DOCUMENT GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Document structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4 Document history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

2 SIBDL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

3 DOWNLOAD WITH SIBDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

END OF DOCUMENT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 6/ 6

6
9600LSY REL.1.0 C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

QUICK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1 DOCUMENT GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.3 Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.4 Handbook structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.5 Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.5.1 Notes on Ed.01Aproposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.5.3 Notes on Ed.02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.5.4 Notes on Ed.03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.5.5 Notes on Ed.04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.6 Document history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.6.1 List of the editions and modified parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.7 Acronyms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.8 Glossary of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

SWP DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2 ALCATEL SOFTWARE PRODUCTS AND LICENCES DELIVERED TO THE CUSTOMER . . . 31
2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.2 Software product list and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.3 Software licence list and part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

3 SWP ADDITIONAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33


3.1 SWP REG. 9600LSY R.1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.1.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

04 020722 S402071501 A.FUMAGALLI ITACO C.NAVA ITACO


E.CORRADINI E.CORRADINI
03 020524 S402040401 A.FUMAGALLI ITACO C.NAVA ITACO
E.CORRADINI E.CORRADINI
01A 011109 proposaldraft A.FUMAGALLI ITACO M.CORBETTA ITACO
E.CORRADINI
ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

9600LSY REL.1.0
SWP REG.9600LSY R1.0
C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 1 / 96

96
3.1.2 SW Package Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.1.3 SW Package Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.1.4 ECT SW SubComponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.1.5 NE MIB Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


3.1.6 DipSwitches setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4 SYSTEM OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.1 LHR System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.2 LHR system layout and equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.2.1 System layout and hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.2.2 Equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.3 ECT and RECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

5 ALLOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND CRAFT TERMINAL SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53


5.1 EquipmentOperator interfaces and local software allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.1.1 LHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.2 OperatorEquipment Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.2.1 WMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

6 GENERAL ON SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59


6.1 Common situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.2 Troubleshooting situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
6.3 SW download with MIB reset on the Flash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

7 HARDWARE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

8 SWP INSTALLATION ON A NEW SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65


8.1 PC hardware characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.2 Operator skills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.3 Summary of SW installation phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
8.4 SWP loading in PC WINDOWSNT environment (offline mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8.4.1 Installation of 1320CT + NE software from SWP CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
8.4.2 Installation of SIBDL program from SWP CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.4.3 End of SW installation from SWP CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.4.4 Craft Terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.4.5 NE Profile management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.4.6 NE software downloading preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
8.5 SW download toward NE (online mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8.5.1 Dipswitch check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8.5.2 Warning about ANTP (Alcatel Network Time Protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8.5.3 LHR SW download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8.6 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.7 Configuration data definition and save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

9 NEW SWP VERSION INSTALLATION (SAME SWP RELEASE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

10 SWP UPGRADING FROM A PREVIOUS SWP RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

11 ECTEQUIPMENT CONNECTION VIA PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK . . . . 75


11.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
11.2 Certified modems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
11.3 Connection cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 2 / 96

96
11.4 Modem setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
11.4.1 Sportster Flash Modem setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
11.4.2 TD32 AC Modem setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
11.5 Setting up the connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

12 DOCUMENTATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
12.1 Productreleaseversion handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
12.1.1 Specific equipment handbooks and CDROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
12.1.2 Related equipment handbooks and CDROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
12.2 General on Alcatel Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
12.2.1 CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
12.2.2 Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
12.2.3 Typical contents of Technical & Craft Terminal Operators Handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
12.2.4 Documentation on paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
12.2.5 Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
12.2.6 Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 3 / 96

96
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

FIGURES

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Fig. 1. Regenerator and WMSN station rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 2. Base Band shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering) . . . . . . 42
Fig. 3. Transceiver shelf equipment (slot numbering and board types and numbering) . . . . . . . . . . 42
Fig. 4. Layout of max 8 channels in single polarization configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fig. 5. Layout of max 8 channels in double polarization configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Fig. 6. Single polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Fig. 7. Two polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with the H
channels on the left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Fig. 8. 2 polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with V channel on
the left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fig. 9. Expansion procedure with reused channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fig. 10. Fan shelf (slot numbering and board types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fig. 11. LHR system (N+1 / N+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fig. 12. Equipment main parts containing local SW (LHR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Fig. 13. System Controller assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Fig. 14. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Fig. 15. WMSN system (N+1 / N+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fig. 16. Software management main phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Fig. 17. Selecting Software Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fig. 18. Directory selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fig. 19. ECTEquipment connection via Public Switched Telephone Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fig. 20. ECTLocal Modem cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fig. 21. F InterfaceRemote Modem cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fig. 22. TD32 AC modem dipswitch setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Fig. 23. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fig. 24. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

TABLES
Tab. 1. Quick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Tab. 2. Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Tab. 3. Document history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Tab. 4. Software products part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Tab. 5. Software licence part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Tab. 6. ESC DipSwitch Bank I4 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Tab. 7. ESC DipSwitch Bank I1 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Tab. 8. LHR Terminal Regenerator System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Tab. 9. Couples of Radio Channels that can be used for protected service channels and WST . . 40
Tab. 10. Equipping rules for FANS assembled unit in Basebandshelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Tab. 11. Handbooks related to the specific product hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Tab. 12. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control . . 84
Tab. 13. Handbooks common to all Alcatel Radio Transmission products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Tab. 14. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Tab. 15. Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Tab. 16. Handbooks related to the products hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Tab. 17. Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 4 / 96

96
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

HANDBOOK GUIDE
SECTION CONTENT PAGE

PRELIMINARY INFORMATION 6

QUICK GUIDE 7

SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING 9

Chapter 1 Document Guide 11


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 5 / 96

96
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
a) Warranty

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Any warranty must be referred exclusively to the terms of the contact of sale of the equipment this

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
handbook refers to.
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or
special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.

b) Information

The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.

c) Copyright Notification

The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.

d) Safety recommendations

The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or
damage to the equipment:

1) Service Personnel
Installation and service must be carried out by authorized people having appropriate technical
training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and
service and of measures to avoid any danger to them, to any other people and to the equipment.

2) Access to the Equipment


Access to the Equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only.

3) Safety norms
Recommended safety norms are not indicated in this manual, but in Handbook REF. [A] on
page 84. The warning labels that can be found on the equipment parts are indicated on page
9.
Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in such handbook
should be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In the case of conflict between safety
instructions stated in such manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local
norms will prevail. Should not local regulations be mandatory, then safety norms in the above
cited manual will prevail.

e) Service Personnel skill


Service Personnel must have been an adequate technical training on telecommunications and in
particular on the equipment this handbook refers to.
Reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in chapter 12 on page 83 is usually
not enough to properly install, operate and maintain equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 6 / 96

96
QUICK GUIDE
N.B. In the documentation on CDROM, this table represent hyperlinks to the referenced parts.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Tab. 1. Quick guide


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

If you need immediate operative information on how to:


GENERAL TOPICS
get information on system
read chapter 12 on page 83 of this handbook
documentation
have a very short description of the
system from the hardware point of read pages 40 thru 44 of this section
view

have the description of the system read chapter System Software overview in SECTION 2
from the software point of view LHR MANAGEMENT

logically configure a station (or


get LHR Technical Handbook (Ref.[A] on page 84) and read
change its configuration) and
its QUICK GUIDE (same topic) (N.B.1)
logically setup connections

logically provision equipment boards read pages 45 thru 50 of this section

get LHR Technical Handbook (Ref.[A] on page 84) and read


getting item P/Ns
its QUICK GUIDE (same topic) (N.B.1)

GENERAL TOPICS FOR INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE


get information on safety, EMC,
read page 9 of this section
ESD norms and equipment labelling
get operative information regarding
the units in IDU shelf (connectors, get LHR Technical Handbook (Ref.[A] on page 84) and read
leds, buttons) its QUICK GUIDE (same topic) (N.B.1)
carry out units hardware setting
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING

physically install and cable the get LHR Installation Handbook (Ref.[B] on page 84) and
equipment hardware proceed as specified by it

install SWP (first time) on ECT and


proceed as specified in chapter 8 on page 65 of this section
equipment

get LHR Lineup Guide (Ref.[C] on page 84) and proceed as


commission equipment
specified by it

update ECT and equipment with a


newer SWP version (same SWP proceed as specified in chapter 9 on page 71 of this section
release)
update ECT and equipment with a
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

proceed as specified in chapter 10 on page 71 of this section


newer SWP release
Tab. 1. continues ..

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 7 / 96

96
.. continues Tab. 1.
If you need immediate operative information on how to:
ECT SOFTWARE USAGE FOR EQUIPMENT SW MANAGEMENT

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
have an overview on menu tree

document, use and communication of its contents


structure
manage equipment configuration
setup parameters for maintenance
(configure housekeeping alarms; open SECTION 2 NE MANAGEMENT of this handbook and
configure the Alarms Management, read its paragraph Document Structure, and then search the
access the Alarm Surveillance and information according to the listed topics.
show the alarm condition).
access the Events Log file
use of the Performance Monitoring
functionalities
set/modify the operator profiles
read para.8.4.5 on page 67 of this section
(username + password)
MAINTENANCE

provision and manage spare parts


get LHR Technical Handbook (Ref.[A] on page 84) and read
its QUICK GUIDE (same topic) (N.B.1)
carry out routine maintenance

get LHR Technical Handbook (Ref.[A] on page 84) , go to its


section MAINTENANCE, paragraph Corrective
Maintenance and proceed as specified; in any case, such
paragraph will usually lead to the SECTION 3 NE
MAINTENANCE of this handbook.

carry out corrective maintenance


Alternatively, access directly SECTION 3 NE
MAINTENANCE of this handbook and proceed as specified;
if a board must be replaced, you will be led to the use of
paragraph Unit Replacement Procedures of LHR
Technical Handbook for the correct replacing procedures.
(N.B.2)

To find any other kind of information not listed in the above table, please start reading para.1.4 on page
14, and then search the information according to the handbook structure described.

N.B.1 The QUICK GUIDE in LHR Technical Handbook is available starting from its ED.02.

N.B.2 Paragraph Unit Replacement Procedures in LHR Technical Handbook is available starting
from its ED.02.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 8 / 96

96
SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
a) Please refer to 9600LSY/LHR Technical Handbook to obtain details regarding following information:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Compliance with European norms


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Safety rules:

TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT


General rules

Dangerous Electrical Voltages

Harmful optical signals

Risk of explosion

Moving mechanical parts

Heatradiating mechanical parts

Microwave radiations

Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges:

TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT

Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)

Other Labels affixed to the Equipment

b) Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, WorkStation etc., other than ALCATELs,
loaded with software applications described in this Handbook, is supplied in the Constructors
technical documentation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 9 / 96

96
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.1:INTRODUCTION

96
3DB 02838 AA AA
10 / 96
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1 DOCUMENT GUIDE

1.1 Introduction
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

This chapter contains all information regarding this handbook is organized as follows:

Handbook applicability on page 12

Purpose of the handbook on page 13

Handbook structure on page 14

Handbook history on page 16

Document history on page 18

Acronyms and abbreviations on page 19

Glossary of terms on page 25


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 11 / 96

96
1.2 Handbook applicability

This handbook applies to the following Product Releases, Network Elements (NE) and Software Packages
(SWP):

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
PRODUCT RELEASE ANV P/N FACTORY P/N
9640LSY
1.00.00 3DB 00581 AAAA 522.171.110
(4 GHz)
9647LSY
1.00.00 3DB 00584 AAAA 522.171.210
(4.7 GHz)
9662LSY
1.00.00 3DB 00587 AAAA 522.171.310
(6.2 GHz)
9667LSY
1.00.00 3DB 00590 AAAA 522.171.410
(6.7 GHz)
9674LSY
1.00.00 3DB 00593 AAAA 522.171.510
(7 GHz)
9681LSY
1.00.00 3DB 00596 AAAA 522.171.610
(8 GHz)
9610LSY
1.00.00 3DB 03936 AAAA 522.171.910
(10 GHz)
9611LSY
1.00.00 3DB 00599 AAAA 522.171.710
(11 GHz)
9613LSY
1.00.00 3DB 02270 AAAA 522.171.810
(13 GHz)

SWP ANV & SWP Version


SWP Release NE
FACTORY P/N (N.B.)
3DB 03179 AAAA
SWP REG.9600LSY R.1.0 LHR 1.0.10
415.201.006 E

For the meaning of SWP Release and Version, please refer to para.12.2.2 on page 88.

N.B. The indication of the Versions in this handbook has the following meaning:

this handbook applies starting from the Versions stated in this table, but it could also apply to
subsequent Versions for the following reasons:

a) the Operator Handbook is not modified, unless the new version distributed to the
Customers comprises changes to the manmachine interface, or even in the presence of
minor changes that do not affect negatively the understandability of the procedures
described therein (e.g. a button moved internally to a screen);

b) furthermore, if the screens contained in the handbook show the versionrelease of the
productrelease, then they are not replaced in the subsequent versions of handbook if
their contents remains unchanged.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 12 / 96

96
1.3 Purpose of the handbook

This handbook belongs to the Customer Documentation set envisaged for the equipment specified in para.
1.2 on page 12.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Please refer to chapter 12 on page 83 to have the list and description of such Customer Documentation
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

set.

This handbook describes the operation and maintenance activities the operators can carry out according
the specific software application(s) referred to in this handbook (see para. 1.2 on page 12).

This handbook must be used together with the associated Technical Handbook and does not replicate
information contained into it.

In particular, all cautions relevant to safety on rules for EMC and ESD, as well as warnings regarding
operations that may cause damages to the equipment, are not duplicated here, but must be retrieved from
the Technical Handbook.

When using this handbook, it is assumed that the Operators know:

the structure (hardware composition) and all the possible operating modes of the equipment
(product-release) that this handbook refers to.

how to use a PC and the Windows environment applications

Before accessing other sections of this handbook, read completely this section in order to have information
on:

SWP P/Ns and composition

how to access the other sections of this handbook according to the SWP type (if more than one
envisaged)

how to manage Craft Terminal SW and Equipment SW for new installations or for upgrading previous
installation to the new SW version.

how to make ECTequipment remote connection on Public Switched Telephone Network.

The document that should be read before starting this document is:

9600LSY/LHR Rel. 1.0 & 2.0 Technical Handbook

N.B. In any case, the Technical Handbook must be always available to the Operator in charge
of the equipment software management, as it contains information and documents that are
used in the procedures described in this manual (e.g. the hardware setting documents, the
unit replacement procedures (N.B.), etc.).
N.B. Paragraph Unit Replacement Procedures is available starting from ED.02 of
9600LSY/LHR Technical Handbook.

Reading the following manual:

1320CT Basic Operators Handbook

is not strictly necessary before starting this document, but its knowledge is necessary for operating the
procedures introduced by this document and detailed in the other sections of this Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 13 / 96

96
1.4 Handbook structure

Information in this handbook is divided into the following main sections:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION (this section)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
This section comprehends the following parts:

HANDBOOK GUIDE (this part)


It contains all information regarding this handbook
This part includes the following parts:
Quick Guide
It allows to access immediately the most frequently needed operative pieces of information
contained in this handbook and in other related handbooks.

Chapter 1 Document guide (this chapter)


This chapter contains all information regarding this handbook (purpose, applicability,
history, abbreviation list, glossary).
SWP DESCRIPTION
This part lists and describes the Software Packages this Handbook refers to, and includes the
following chapters:

Chapter 2 Alcatel Software Products and Licences delivered to Customer


This chapter gives commercial information regarding the Software Packages this
handbook refers to, i.e. the SWP and Software Licences P/Ns.
Chapter 3 SWP additional information
This chapter gives operative information regarding the Software Packages this handbook
refers to: requirements (PC and equipment Firmware), SW Package Identification, SW
Package Components, ECT SW SubComponents, NE MIB Compatibility and
Softwaredependent DipSwitches setting.
INSTALLATION
This part describes in detail the operations necessary for the SWP installation and upgrading
(ECT parts and equipment parts) and includes the following chapters:
Chapter 4 System overview
This chapter replicates some information still present in the 9600LSY Technical
Handbook, that can be useful as refresh for the Operator in charge of the equipment
software management.
Chapter 5 Allocation of equipment and Craft Terminal Software
This chapter presents the Equipment from a software point of view, not dealing with the
detailed equipment software functionalities (that are entrusted to the other sections of this
handbook or to other associated manuals), but pointing out the software allocation and the
general software management rules (installation, download, equipment data backup and
restore), that the Operator should always mind when operates on the equipment software.
Chapter 6 General on Software installation and management
This chapter introduces the basic information regarding the software management, with
particular emphasis on SWP version and release upgrading situations and special
troubleshooting situations.
Chapter 7 Hardware installation
A reference to the specific handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 14 / 96

96
Chapter 8 SWP installation of a new system
This chapter details all phases necessary to install for the first time a SWP in the PC
environment as well as in the equipment environment.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Chapter 9 Upgrading to a newer SWP version (same SWP release)


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

This chapter details all phases necessary to install a new SWP version in the PC
environment as well as in the equipment environment.
Chapter 10 SWP upgrading from a previous SWP release
This chapter details all phases necessary to install a new SWP release in the PC
environment as well as in the equipment environment.
APPENDICES
In this part some additional information and instructions are given.
This part includes the following chapters:
Chapter 11 Remote connection via public switched telephone network
This chapter explains the operations necessary to allow the remote connection to the
FInterface, from a local PC configurated as ECT, through a switched telephone line of the
standard Public Telephone Network.
Chapter 12 Documentation guide
This chapter contains all information regarding the Customer Documentation, in particular
the list of the handbooks the Operators should have in order to carry out the required
operations.

SECTION 2: LHR NE MANAGEMENT


In this section, the description of the menu structure and of all the LHR NE functionalities available
in the Craft Terminal is given. This section is organized in several chapters grouped according to the
following scheme:
General information
Equipment configuration management
Setting of parameters for maintenance
Events Log and Performance Monitoring management
Software management
Appendices
Please read chapter Document guide at beginning of SECTION 2: LHR NE MANAGEMENT for a
more detailed guide.

SECTION 3: LHR NE MAINTENANCE


In this section the description of the LHR NE troubleshooting based on the use of the Craft Terminal
is given.
Please read chapter Document guide at beginning of SECTION 3: LHR NE MAINTENANCE for
a more detailed guide.

SECTION 4: SIBDL MANUAL


The SIBDL Manual describes the SIBDL application, used to download the NE software via Q or F
interface.
The need for the usage of this application is explained in part INSTALLATION of this section.
Please read chapter Document guide at beginning of SECTION 4: SIBDL MANUAL MANUAL for
a more detailed guide.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 15 / 96

96
1.5 Handbook history

This handbook is a collection of documents (each contained in a specific section) which can
have editions different from one another.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


The section edition indicated in the following table is that of the corresponding document

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
enclosed in the handbook.
The Edition and the completion date of the whole handbook are those of section 1 (HANDBOOK
GUIDE).

Tab. 2. Handbook history


HANDBOOK EDITION 01 02 03 04 05 06
REGISTER AND SECTION TITLE SECTION EDITION
1 INTRODUCTION 01 02 03 04
2 LHR NE MANAGEMENT 01 02 03 04
3 LHR NE MAINTENANCE 01 02 02 02
4 SIBDL MANUAL 01 02 02 02

1.5.1 Notes on Ed.01Aproposal

Ed.01A issued on November 9, 2001 is the first neither released nor validated version of the handbook.

1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01

Ed.01 issued on January 11, 2002 is the first officially released and validated version of the handbook.

1.5.3 Notes on Ed.02

Ed.02 issued on March 08, 2002 has been done mainly to correct some errors in Section 2 LHR NE
MANAGEMENT. Other changes are relevant to the handbook quality improvement, in particular:
a new QUICK GUIDE at the beginning of handbook allows to access immediately the most frequently
needed operative pieces of information contained in this handbook and in other related handbooks.
a new chapter System overview in Section 1 INTRODUCTION
a new chapter Document guide in all sections, for better leading to the desired information and for
better tracing changes in the various editions.
in all sections, some chapters have been shifted with respect to each other, for more logical
information sequence.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 16 / 96

96
1.5.4 Notes on Ed.03

Ed.03 issued on May 24, 2002 has been done to align the handbook to the SWP Version 1.0.9. New
features and specific modifications introduced by this Version are the following:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Compatibility with Windows 2000 (see para.3.1.1 on page 33 in this section)


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Security Management extension to support different Operator profiles (see para.3.1.1 on page 33
in this section)
On Power Measurements function, some power values have been removed (see chapter Radio
Parameters in section 2 LHR NE MANAGEMENT)
Not Intrusive BER Measurements function has been introduced (see chapter Port View in section
2 LHR NE MANAGEMENT)
Moreover:
the description of RFCOH Management (feature already present in previous SWP version but not
documented in handbook Ed.02) has been introduced (see new chapter Way side traffic and
service channels protection management in section 2 LHR NE MANAGEMENT)
other modifications have been introduced in sections 1 and 2 for handbook quality improvements and
error corrections.

1.5.5 Notes on Ed.04

Ed.04 issued on July 22, 2002 has been done to align the handbook to the SWP Version 1.0.10 (see
para.3.1.2 on page 34 in this section). New features and specific modifications introduced by this Version
are the following:
On all alarms a specific management of Additional Text field has been inserted.
Such field can be displayed by Operator through Alarm Surveillance ECT/SH tool as additional
information to better understand and identify associated entity.
Additional Text field is not available on related records stored inside Alarm Log.
A new feature to activate from ECT a procedure for FPGA upgrade has been introduced.
Moreover other modifications have been introduced in sections 1 and 2 for handbook quality
improvements and error corrections.
Revision bars point out major (listed above) and minor (not listed above) modifications with respect to
previous edition.
Revision bars in correspondence of empty lines or empty table rows, point out parts eliminated.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 17 / 96

96
1.6 Document history

The document history hereafter reported is relevant to this section INTRODUCTION. At the beginning
of the other sections making up this handbook, there is a document history specific for the section.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
1.6.1 List of the editions and modified parts

The first and the two most recent editions of the document are indicated in the table of contents. Changes
with respect to the previous edition are pointed out by revision bars.

The following Tab. 3. indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.

Legend
n = new part
m = modified part
blank = part unchanged

Tab. 3. Document history


DOCUMENT EDITION 01 02 03 04 05
HANDBOOK GUIDE n
1 Document guide n m m m
SWP DESCRIPTION n
2 Alcatel software products and licences delivered to the Customer n
3 SWP additional information n m m m


INSTALLATION n
4
5
System overview
Allocation of equipment and Craft Terminal software
n
n m
m
m
m
6 General on software installation and management n m m
7 Hardware installation n m
8 SWP installation on a new system n m m
9 New SWP version installation (same SWP release) n m
10 SWP upgrading from a previous SWP release n m
APPENDICES n
ECTEquipment connection via public switched telephone
11 n
network
12 Documentation guide n m m
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 18 / 96

96
1.7 Acronyms and abbreviations

ACD: Access Control Domain


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ADM: Add/Drop Multiplexer


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

AIS: Alarm Indication Signal

ALR: Automatic Laser Restart

ALS: Automatic Laser Shutdown

ANTP: Alcatel Network Time Protocol

APS: Automatic Protection Switching

ASAP: Alarm Severity Assignment Profile

ATM: Asynchronous Transfer Mode

ATPC: Automatic Transmit Power Control

AU: Administrative Unit

AUG: Administrative Unit Group

AVC: Attribute Value Change

BBE: Background Block Error

BER: Bit Error Rate

BIP: Bit Interleaved Parity

CMI: Coded Mark Inversion

CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check

CRU: Clock Reference Unit

CSES: Consecutive Severely Errored Second

CTP: Connection Termination Point

CDROM: Compact Disc Read Only Memory

CCITT: Telegraph and Telephone International Consultative Committee

CT: Craft Terminal

DCC: Data Communication Channel

DCN: Data Communications Network

DEM: DEModulator
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

EB: Errored Block

EC: Equipment Controller

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 19 / 96

96
ECT: Equipment Craft Terminal

EFD: Event Forwarding Discriminator

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


ECC: Embedded Communication Channels

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
EML: Element Management Layer

EOW: Engineering Order Wire

EPS: Equipment Protection Switching

ES: Errored Second

ES: End System

ETSI: European Telecommunication Standard Institute

EW: Early Warning

FAD: Functional Access Domain

GA: General Alarm

FEBBE: Far End Background Block Error

FEBE: Far End Block Error

FEES: Far End Errored Second

FESES: Far End Severely Errored Second

FERF: Far End Receive Failure

Gbit/s: Gigabits per second

GNE: Gateway Network Element

HCS: Higher order Connection Supervision

HBER: High Bit Error Rate

HMI: Human Machine Interface

HO: Higher Order

HOA: Higher Order Assembler

HOI: Higher Order Interface

HP: High Power

HPA: Higher Order Path Adaption

HPC: Higher Order Path Connection

HPOM: Higher Order Path Overhead Monitor


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

HPT: Higher Order Path Termination

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 20 / 96

96
HS: High Speed

HSUT: Higher Order Supervisory Unequipped Termination


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HTCA: Higher Order Tandem Connection Adaption


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

HTCM: Higher Order Tandem Connection Monitor

HTCT: Higher Order Tandem Connection Termination

HUG: Higher Order Path Unequipped Generator

HST: Hot STandby

ID: Identifier

IDU: InDoor Unit

ISO: International Standards Organization

IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IM: Information Manager

IP: Input Port

IS: Intermediate System

Kbit/s: Kilobits per second

LAN: Local Area Network

LAPD: Link Access Procedure on Dchannel

LBER: Low Bit Error Rate

LCS: Lower Order Connection Supervision

LHR: Long Haul Regenerator

LO: Local Oscillator

LOF: Loss Of Frame

LOI: Lower Order Interface

LOP: Loss Of Pointer

LOS: Loss Of Signal

LPA: Lower Order Path Adaptation

LPC: Lower Order Path Connection

LPOM: Lower Order Path Overhead Monitor

LPT: Lower Order Path Termination


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

LSUT: Lower Order Supervisory Unequipped Termination

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 21 / 96

96
LTCA: Lower Order Tandem Connection Adaption

LTCM: Lower Order Tandem Connection Monitor

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


LTCT: Lower Order Tandem Connection Termination

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
LVC: Lower Order Virtual Container

LS: Low Speed

LUG: Lower Order Unequipped Generator

LVDS: Low Voltage Differential Signals

MAC: Media Access Control

MESA: Manual ES Adjacencies

Mbit/s: Megabits per seconds

MIB: Management Information Base

MOD: Modulator

MS: Multiplex Section

MSA: Multiplex Section Adaption

MSOH: Multiplex Section OverHead

MSP: Multiplex Section Protection

MST: Multiplex Section Termination

MSp: Manual Switch to protecting channel

MSw: Manual Switch to working channel

NAD: Network Access Domain

NAP: Network Access Point

NE: Network Element

NML: Network Management Layer

NTP: Network Time Protocol

OBPS: On Board Power Supply

ODU: OutDoor Unit

OH: OverHead

OHA: OverHead Access

OP: Output Port


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

OS: Operation System

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 22 / 96

96
PDH: Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PI: Physical Interface


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

PJE: Pointer Justification Events


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

PLL: Phase Locked Loop

POH: Path OverHead

PPI: PDH Physical Interface

PPS:Path Protection Switch

PSU: Power Supply Unit

QOS: Quality Of Service

RAP: Reachable Address Prefixes

RC: Radio Controller

RDI: Remote Defect Indication

RECT: Remote Equipment Craft Terminal

REI: Remote Error Indication

RPS: Radio Protection Switching

RRA: Radio Regenerator Adaptation

RMD: Radio Regenerator adaptation MoDem

RPS: Radio Protection Switching

RS: Regenerator Section

RSOH: Regenerator Section OverHead

RSPI: Radio Synchronous Physical Interface

RST: Regenerator Section Termination

SAM: Service Auxiliary Management

SC: Service Channel

SD: Signal Degrade

SDH: Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SEC: SDH Equipment Clock

SES: Severely Errored Second

SF: Signal Fail


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SNCP: Sub Network Connection Protection

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 23 / 96

96
SOH: Section OverHead

SPI: SDH Physical Interface

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


SSF: Server Signal Fail

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
SSU: Synchronization Supply Unit

STM1: Synchronous Transport Module 1

SWP: Software Package

TCA: Threshold Crossing Alarm

TM: Terminal Multiplexer

TMN: Telecommunications Management Network

TN: Telecommunications Network

TP: Termination Point

TPH: TelePHone

TSF: Trail Server Failure

TTF: Transport Terminal Function

TTP: Trail Termination Point

UAS: UnAvailable Second

UAT: UnAvailable Time

UHM: Urban Haul split mount terminal Multiplexer

UHMC: Urban Haul split mount terminal Multiplexer Compact

UHR: Urban Haul split mount terminal Regenerator

UHRC: Urban Haul split mount terminal Regenerator Compact

UPA: UnAvailable Path Alarm

URU: Underlying Resource UnAvailable

USM: User Service Manager

VCn: Virtual Container n

VCO: Voltage Controlled Oscillator

XPIC: Cross Polar Interference Canceller

XC: CrossConnection

WST: Way Side Traffic


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 24 / 96

96
1.8 Glossary of terms

Acknowledgment:
When an alarm is taken into account by the application, the operator has to acknowledge it to point out
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

that he has seen it and that he will react in the right way. During alarm configuration it is possible to set
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

a maximum delay for alarm acknowledgement. The operator can decide whether or not the alarm clear
has to be acknowledged.

Administrator:
A user who has access rights to all the Management Domains of the Craft Terminal product. He has access
to the whole network and to all the management functionalities.

Alarm:
An alerting indication to a condition that may have an immediate or potentially negative impact on the state
of an equipment or the CT. An alarm is characterized by an alarm begin and an alarm end.

Alarm Severity Assignment Profile:


Function allowing the assignment of severities to the alarms depending on their probable causes.

Alarm Status:
Identifies the type and severity of an occurring alarm.

Board:
A board is part of an NE. They are electronic cards that fit into slots in the NE.

Compact Disk Read Only Memory:


Data saving support from which the information can only be read. Is useful for stocking data due to its
available memory space.

Craft Terminal:
Workstation or Personal computer (PC) from which local address to an NE is possible. It can be used to
configure or perform monitoring tasks on the NE.

Crossconnection
CrossConnections provide the network with the Routing Capabilities, this is the possibility of routing one
signal to a particular destination.

Digital Communication network:


Communication Network in which the transmission of data is done in a digitized format.

Embedded Communication Channel:


Communication channel used in conjunction with packet commuting networks (X25) to manage distant
SDH networks. These communication channels are related to the QECC* protocols.

Element Management Layer:


This application is responsible for the configuration and management of Network Elements.

Equipment Protection Switching:


Used to provide protection for cards within an equipment to protect traffic in the event of card failure.

Filter:
They are related to the alarms or events generated on an NE or internally within the OS itself. They can
be configured by an operator to reject specified types of notifications and limit the processing that is applied
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

to them.

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 25 / 96

96
Flushing:
This deals with logs. When a log is flushed, all its records are deleted.

Functional Access Domain:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


It defines the range of functions which are available to a specified user.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Gigabits per second:
Unit that corresponds to the transmission of 109 bits every second.

Gateway Network Element:


It is a Network Element devoted to the control, from the OS, of those NEs providing a QECC* interface.
To do this it uses a QB3* interface and performs the conversion QB3* QECC*.

Human Machine Interface:


It is the graphical user interface application through which the operators interact with the system.

History Report:
This function enables operators to get information concerning performances, security or alarms on entities
composing the network, or on the network itself. The operator specifies the time period for which he
requires the report.

International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee:


Standard organization for telecommunications. Now called the ITUT (International Telecommunication
Union).

Kilobits per second:


Unit that correspond to the transmission of 103 bits every second.

Line Terminal:
A line terminal is the end point of a communication link. it is used to transmit or receive signals. They can
undertake signal conversion functions (adapting a signal to two different transmission media) or
multiplexing/demultiplexing functions.

Logs:
Logs are files used to store history data concerning the incoming notifications, operator commands and
system alarms. The size of the log can be configured.

Management Domain:
The Craft Terminal product is partitioned into management domains for functional proposes. Each
management domain is associated with functionalities that enable the operators to manage the NEs.

Media Access Control Address:


Represents the Level 2 address for Local Area Networks.

Megabits per second:


Unit that corresponds to the transmission of 106 bits every second.

Network Access Domain:


Defined as a set of Network Elements. NADs are used to define the set of Network Elements that a user
can manage.

Network Element:
Either a telecommunication equipment or groups parts of a Telecommunication Network. Have
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

characteristics compliant with CCITT recommendations.

Network Management Level:


Designates the management functions performed on networks elements assembled in a network.

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 26 / 96

96
Notification:
Spontaneous data received by the system concerning an NE.

Operation System:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

A system dedicated to the supervision of NEs in a standard way, using protocols and interfaces. it offers to
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

the operator a set of functions necessary to supervise the NEs. The 1353SH is an Operation System.

Operator:
The enduser of the Craft Terminal. He supervises a part of the network that is dependant on his user profile.

Physical Interface:
Electrical or Electrical/Optical transformers that decouple the line signals and adapt the form of signal for
further transmission. This functional block also manages clock extraction, signal loss monitoring and
loopback functions.

Port:
A physical point at which the Network Element can be attached to a transmission medium. A port is either
a termination point or an origination point.

Repeater:
Equipment used to regenerate a signal when it has travelled a long distance.

Severity:
Linked to alarms, severities indicate the magnitude related to the failure.

Telecommunication Management Network:


Defines the concept of interoperable management of TNs. They provide an organized network structure
to achieve the interconnection of the different components of the TN and the services to process the
information.

Telecommunication Network:
Describes the network to be managed. Provides the transmission, the transport and the switching
supports to the interconnected Network Elements.

Terminal Point:
Describes either the origin or the termination of a signal in an equipment. Is related to a port.

Thresholding:
This is the assignment of a specified value to monitored parameters ( for example BIt Error Rates) that,
when exceeded, generate trouble indications.

User Profile:
Identifies the functionalities of the Craft Terminal to which a user has access. A finite number of predefined
user profiles is determined by a fixed set of FADs. To give user access to Craft Terminal functionality, the
administrator must assign a profile to a UNIX user account by choosing one among the predefined profiles
installed with Craft Terminal.

User Service Manager:


These are presentation processes used by the Craft Terminal to manage the Human Machine Interface
and facilitate the interaction with the product.

Wrapping:
Wrapping is the technique that enables the most recent entries in a file to replace the oldest when a file
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

is full.

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 27 / 96

96
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.1:INTRODUCTION

96
3DB 02838 AA AA
28 / 96
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

SWP DESCRIPTION
SECTION CONTENT PAGE

Chapter 2 Alcatel software products and licences delivered to the Customer 31

Chapter 3 SWP additional information 33


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 29 / 96

96
Refer to para.1.4 on page 14 for an overview of the scopes and contents of this part.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The symbol points out references to Other Handbooks or to other sections of this same
Handbook.

In the documentation on CDROM they represent hyperlinks to the handbooks referenced to.

Referenced handbook P/Ns are given in chapter 12 on page 83.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 30 / 96

96
2 ALCATEL SOFTWARE PRODUCTS AND LICENCES DELIVERED TO THE
CUSTOMER

This chapter gives commercial information regarding the Software Packages this handbook refers to, i.e.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

the SWP and Software Licences P/Ns.

2.1 General

The software products are distributed by Alcatel in a CDROM.

In this CDROM are contained:

Software packages for NE management by means of the craft terminal

Software package of the NE, to be installed in the NE or update the NE (by means of download
function)

The software package used for management allows the dialogue between craft terminal and NE, to
realize all the functions of the NE and EMLUSM ).

The software package used for updating the NE must be installed on the PC and then downloaded on
the NE, thus following product evolution.

Alcatel typically offers several software licences on the software product (only one for this equipment).

They are referred both to the Network Element software features and to the Craft Terminal software
features.

2.2 Software product list and part numbers

Every Software Product is identified by a denomination and a part number and is distributed by a CDROM
with the same identifiers, listed on the following table:

Tab. 4. Software products part numbers

Factory
Name ANV Part Number N.B.
Part Number

SWP REG. 9600LSY R.1.0 3DB 03179 AAAA 415.201.006 E 1

N.B. 1 Software Package associated to LCT or RCT SW Licence ( For LHR NEs).
See para.2.3 on page 32 for additional information.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 31 / 96

96
2.3 Software licence list and part numbers

Every Software licence is identified by a denomination and a part number, listed on the following table.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Tab. 5. Software licence part numbers

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Factory
Name ANV Part Number N.B.
Part Number

SWLA LHR Rel. 1.0 LICENCE FEE 3DB 03027 AAAA 700.500.008 J

SWLB LHR Rel. 1.0 LICENCE FEE 3DB 03028 AAAA 700.500.009 K 1

SWLC LHR Rel. 1.0 LICENCE FEE 3DB 03029 AAAA 700.500.0010 F

SWLA LHM Rel. 1.0 LICENCE FEE 3DB 03030 AAAA 700.500.011 U

SWLB LHM Rel. 1.0 LICENCE FEE 3DB 03031 AAAA 700.500.012 V 2

SWLC LHM Rel. 1.0 LICENCE FEE 3DB 03032 AAAA 700.500.013 W

SWLLCT ( Local Craft Terminal )


3DB 03033 AAAA 700.500.014 X
9600LSY Rel. 1.0 LICENCE FEE
3
SWLRCT ( Remote Craft Terminal )
3DB 03034 AAAA 700.500.015 Y
9600LSY Rel 1.0 LICENCE FEE

N.B. 1 Licence alternative for Network Element software features:


SWLA: software licence A type for regenerator configuration
SWLB: software licence B type for regenerator configuration
SWLC: software licence C type for regenerator configuration

2 Licence alternative for Network Element software features:


SWLA: software licence A type for WMSN configuration
SWLB: software licence B type for WMSN configuration
SWLC: software licence C type for WMSN configuration

3 Licence alternative for Craft Terminal software features:


SWLLCT: local Craft Terminal functionality
SWLRCT: remote Craft Terminal functionality.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 32 / 96

96
3 SWP ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

This chapter gives operative information regarding the Software Packages this handbook refers to:
requirements (PC and equipment Firmware), SW Package Identification, SW Package Components, ECT
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

SW SubComponents, NE MIB Compatibility and Softwaredependent DipSwitches setting.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Please refer to para.12.2.2 on page 88 for the meaning of SWP Release, Version and Patch Level.

N.B. With reference to the Versions stated in this chapter, please read carefully the
N.B. on page 12.
In case you receive a SWP with version higher than that stated, please refer to
the documentation accompanying the SWP delivery to get this information.

3.1 SWP REG. 9600LSY R.1.0

3.1.1 Requirements

For ECT installation it is necessary a PC with the requirement hereafter described.

Basic requirements:
CPU Pentium II 200MHz
RAM 64MB (128MB suggested)
Hard Disk 2GB (4GB suggested)
Display size 12 (14 suggested)
Display resolution 1024x768 pixels

Additional HW requirements:
CDRom drive
Ethernet card (optional)
Floppy Disk drive (optional)

Additional SW requirements:
Windows NT 4.0 SP3 or Windows 2000
Netscape Communicator or MS Internet Explorer 4.x

Reference firmware release and related specific contents are the following:

SWP9600LSYSU V1.0.12
SU_ESC V2.1.4
SU_HK V2.0.2
SU_SMA V2.1.6
SU_RRA_STBY V2.1.8
SU_RRA V2.1.7
SU_MODEM128_STM1 V2.1.9
SU_MODEM128_STM0 V2.1.8
SU_TRI V2.0.13
SU_FANS V2.0.2
SU_ROUTER_LH V2.0.1
DAIANA V1.0.1
ENTONI V1.0.7
SCIARON V1.0.2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

NUNZIA V1.0.7
SANDRA V1.0.2

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 33 / 96

96
N.B. With reference to the Versions stated on this page, please read carefully the
N.B. on page 12.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


3.1.2 SW Package Identification

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Identification Version Date

SWP REG. 9600LSY R1.0 V1.0.10 July 18th, 2002

3.1.3 SW Package Components

Name Description Version

SW Package for 2G Radio Regenerator Long Haul


SWP REG. 9600LSY R1.0 V1.0.10
Equipments

SWCECT9600LSY_V20 Equipment Craft Terminal SW Component V2.0.21

SWCEC9600LSY_V20 Equipment Controller SW Component V2.0.14

SWCRC9600LSY_V20 Radio Controller SW Component V2.0.22

SWCFD9600LSY_V10 File Descriptor for SW Download Component V1.0.10

3.1.4 ECT SW SubComponents

Name Version Description

JRE V1.3 Java 2 Run Time Environment

Q3CTP V1.5.1.6 Equipment Craft Terminal Base Platform

LLMAN V1.2.1 Lower Layers Manager

USMMWCOMMON V2.0.21 User Service Manager Common Part for all Q3 MW Nes

USMMWREGLSY V1.0.10 User Service Manager Specific Part for REG. LSY Nes

3.1.5 NE MIB Compatibility

NE MIB on EC is compatible with previous version V1.0.8 and 1.0.9.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 34 / 96

96
3.1.6 DipSwitches setting

On main board System Controller units main board (see Fig. 13. on page 56) are present two
dipswitches, I1 and I4, used to identify the main HW characteristics and equipment type.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

For the position of these dipswitches, see section:

UNIT HW PRESETTING of 9600LSY/LHR Technical Handbook

DipSwitches details are hereafter reported, remember that 1 value correspond to Open or Off while 0
value corresponds to Close or On.

3.1.6.1 EQTYPE

EQTYPE field is fixed to 0110 (Dec. 6) to indicate Long Haul system (there are no Dipswitch banks to
set).

3.1.6.2 BKPV (BacKPanel Version) field

According to following Tab. 6.

Tab. 6. ESC DipSwitch Bank I4 setting


BKPV
I4 switches Dec Description
3 2 1
0 0 0 0 LHRC Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Compact
0 0 1 1 LHR Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator
0 1 0 2 LHRR Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Repeater
DipSwitch I4 /45678 must be set to 1 (Open or Off).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 35 / 96

96
3.1.6.3 SLOTID field for LHR

According to following Tab. 7.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Tab. 7. ESC DipSwitch Bank I1 setting

SLOTID
I1 switches Equip. Subrack STM0/ Space
Dec Subrack TRI
Type BB STM1 Diversity
6 5 4 3 2 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STM0
SRTRI1HET
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 STM1
1+1
SRBB11
0 0 0 0 1 0 2 HET STM0 SD
SRTRISD1HET
0 0 0 0 1 1 3 STM1 SD

0 0 0 1 0 0 4 STM0
SRTRIN
0 0 0 1 0 1 5 STM1
N+1 SRBBN1
0 0 0 1 1 0 6 STM0 SD
SRTRISDN
0 0 0 1 1 1 7 STM1 SD

0 0 1 0 0 0 8 STM0
SRTRIN
0 0 1 0 0 1 9 STM1
N+0 SRBBN0
0 0 1 0 1 0 10 STM0 SD
SRTRISDN
0 0 1 0 1 1 11 STM1 SD

DipSwitch I1 /78 must be set to 1 (Open or Off).


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 36 / 96

96
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

INSTALLATION
SECTION CONTENT PAGE

Chapter 4 System overview 39

Chapter 5 Allocation of equipment and Craft Terminal software 53

Chapter 6 General on software installation and management 59

Chapter 7 Hardware installation 64

Chapter 8 SWP installation on a new system 65

Chapter 9 Upgrading to a newer SWP version (same SWP release) 71

Chapter 10 SWP upgrading from a previous SWP release 71


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 37 / 96

96
Refer to para.1.4 on page 14 for an overview of the scopes and contents of this part.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The symbol points out references to Other Handbooks or to other sections of this same
Handbook.

In the documentation on CDROM they represent hyperlinks to the handbooks referenced to.

Referenced handbook P/Ns are given in chapter 12 on page 83.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 38 / 96

96
4 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

This chapter replicates some information still present in the 9600LSY/LHR Technical Handbook, that can
be useful as refresh for the Operator in charge of the equipment software management, and is organized
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

as follows:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

LHR System Configurations on page 40

LHR system layout and equipping rules on page 41


including:

System layout and hardware components on page 41

Equipment provisioning on page 45

ECT and RECT on page 51

For further details, please refer to 9600LSY/LHR Technical Handbook.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 39 / 96

96
4.1 LHR System Configurations
The LHR system can interface from two up to eight channels (STM0/STM1 Electrical or Optical signals
and the corresponding Radio parts) and up to eight WST channels. The system configurations allowed

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


are with Radio Protection Switching (N+1 without/with Occasional Traffic) or without Radio Protection

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Switching (N+0), according to the following table:

Tab. 8. LHR Terminal Regenerator System Configurations

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
N+1 &
NR. of Occasional
N+0 N+1 ALL
channels
(1:N)

CH CH CH max WST

1+1 2 unpr.
2 2+0 1+1
& Occ. or 1 prot.

2+1 3 unpr. or
3 3+0 2+1
& Occ. 1 prot.+1 unpr.

3+1 4 unpr. or
4 4+0 3+1
& Occ. 1 prot.+2 unpr.

4+1 5 unpr. or
5 5+0 4+1
& Occ. 1 prot.+3 unpr.

5+1 6 unpr. or
6 6+0 5+1
& Occ. 1 prot.+4 unpr.

6+1 7 unpr. or
7 7+0 6+1
& Occ. 1 prot.+5 unpr.

7+1 8 unpr. or
8 8+0 7+1
& Occ. 1 prot.+6 unpr.

unpr.= unprotected prot.= protected Occ.= occasional


In N+0 configurations, channels are without protection.
In N+1 configurations, channel 0 is always the standby channel.
In N+1 & Occasional configurations (also known as 1:N protection architecture), channel 0 carries the
occasional traffic, that is cut off whenever it becomes the recovery channel for any (faulty) of the protected
channels.
As indicated in Tab. 8. above, the WST configuration is independent from N+0 / N + 1 / 1:N system
configuration. The couple of radio channels which carry both the protected service channels and WST
ones (if any) is defined via software. These channels can be chosen among the following five couples:
Tab. 9. Couples of Radio Channels that can be used for protected service channels and WST
CHx CHy
0 1
0 9
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1 2
1 9
8 9

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 40 / 96

96
4.2 LHR system layout and equipping rules

4.2.1 System layout and hardware components


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 1. herebelow shows the OPTINEX rack layout respectively in Regenerator and WMSN
configurations.

In the following, only information regarding Regenerator configuration is refreshed, in particular as far as
Base Band shelf, Transceiver shelf and Fans for RRA/MODEM shelf are concerned.

For further or other information, please refer to 9600USY/LHR Technical Handbook.

TRU TRU
ADDITIONAL
HOUSEKEEPING
1650
(optional)
SMC
SHELF
FANS FOR
1650SMC
RRA/MODEM RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS AND ACCESS
AREA AREA
(BASEBAND (BASEBAND
SHELF) FANS FOR SHELF)
RRA/MODEM
Rx Rx
BRANCHING BRANCHING

TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER
SHELF SHELF

Tx Tx
BRANCHING BRANCHING

REGENERATOR WMSN

Fig. 1. Regenerator and WMSN station rack configuration


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 41 / 96

96
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


S S R R R R R R M R M R M R M R M

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
M M M M M
Y E R R R R R R D R D R D R D R D
D D D D D
S R A A A A A A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9
0 1 2 3 4
C V 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
O

P P P P P P P P P P P P
S S S S S S S S S S S S
F U U U U U U U U U U F
1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Fig. 2. Base Band shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering)

T T T T T T T T T T
R R R R R R R R R R
I I I I I I I I I I
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Fig. 3. Transceiver shelf equipment (slot numbering and board types and numbering)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 42 / 96

96
The functions performed in Base Band shelf are:

a) RRA
Performs the following main functions :
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

STM1 bidirectional interface, electrical or optical selectable by means of interchangeable


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

plugins
Extraction/Insertion RSOH line side to/from Aux. Service Board
Hitless Switch functionality.
Just one unit has been developed for utilization with both STM1 and STM0 capacity.
Each RRA unit is equipped with an embedded STM1 electrical interface. As an option, a S 1.1
STM1 optical interface can be used instead. This optical interface is realized by a plugin unit that
can be installed in the RRA through the front panel.

b) RRA Standby board


It is equipped only in slot 3 (see Fig. 2. on page 42) in N+1 (1:N )configurations.
The unit performs the same functionalities of RRA board but, moreover, the hitless switch circuits
(Tx/Rx distributors and a switching logic unit) are is installed on board and dedicated to the radio
section protection.
The protection supplied is N+1 type and it is also utilized in 1+1 configuration .
Only one RRA STBY has been developed for utilization with both STM1 and STM0 capacity.

c) MD Modem unit
Performs the following main functions:
Terminal modulator
Terminal demodulator
XPIC
Baseband signal combiner
Two different 128 QAM modems have been developed, according to the two capacities that can be
transmitted:
STM1 Modem with one 2 Mbit/s WST service stream: to be used in both alternate and copolar
frequency arrangements with all the spacings including 28 MHz.
The STM0 Modem without WST service stream: utilized in 7 , 8 and 13 GHz bands with 14
MHz channel spacing in both alternate and copolar frequency arrangements.

Each modem can be equipped with an optional plugin board . This board gives the access to the
IF signals necessary to the demodulator for XPIC or for Space Diversity functionalities. In case of
presence of both functions the modem must be equipped with two identical plugin boards.

d) SERV Service Unit


The Service board provides an external access to the auxiliary service channels, utilizing SUBD
connectors in the subrack connector area. Moreover the unit manages the ATPC functionality.
Service unit consents the terminal to transmit one WST 2 Mb/s service stream in Radio Frame
Complementary OverHead in protected way on channels x and y (that can be choosen among the
couples specified in Tab. 9. on page 40), and contains the logic switching unit. The WST interface
is present on the unit front panel. The accesses to the other WST service streams that can be
transmitted one for each channel in nonprotected way are in the connector area.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 43 / 96

96
e) SYSCO System Controller
The S.C. is devoted to the equipment management. It exchanges alarms, commands and
management information with the other units of the equipment and provides the following interfaces
for local and remote management:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Channel communication for TMN utilizing a QB3 interface (BNC connector) info model based

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
F interface (RS232 toward the local PC) (SUBD 9 pin connector) towards Local Craft
Terminal
QECC interface for remote management through DCC channels.

f) Additional Housekeeping unit


This optional unit (equipped as depicted in Fig. 1. on page 41) increases by 18 the number of
Housekeeping inputs available with SYSCO board.

g) PSU Power Supply


PSU units are grouped in 2units groups (i.e. PSU0+PSU1, PSU2+PSU3, ...). Each PSU pair
converts and then distributes, through the backpanel, power supply to the correspondent pair of
RRA, whereas each PSU board supplies only the associated MODEM board (i.e. PSU0 supplies only
MODEM0 board, etc) If not utilized, the P.S. slots are provided with a front plate cover.
Each P.S. gets the primary voltage from both batteries, connected in parallel.
The P. S. units supply the secondary power voltage to all the units starting from the primary voltage:
48 to 60 Vdc ( 20%);
The system can also be powered by batteries with different voltage: 24 Vdc ( 20%). In this case,
onpurpose designed DC/DC converters (in preparation) will have to be installed in the lower area
of the rack.

h) PSF Battery filter


Two battery filters, located in the lower side positions of the subrack, supply the DC power to the
common units (System Controller, Service) in 1+1 protected way.

The functions performed in Transceiver shelf are:

i) TRI Transceiver
Performs the following main functions:

The transmitter includes an IF amplifier, a SSB up converter, a local oscillator and a RF power
amplifier.
The utilization of a high rejection SSB upconverter permits to avoid the use of a RF filter at the
output, allowing a wideband utilization of the unit.
The Automatic Transmitted Power Control (ATPC) function is included in the transceiver in
order to decrease the Tx power output and dissipation in case of normal propagation and to
push the maximum power up in deep fading conditions. This function may be disabled and the
level of the transmitted RF power can be manually set by Craft Terminal configuration.

The receiver includes a low noise RF preamplifier, an automatic imagine rejection down
converter, an IF filter, a main amplifier with AGC and a local oscillator.
A space diversity receiver, to be used in junction with a baseband signal combiner, is also
available as countermeasure to the selective fading due to the multipath propagation of the
signal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 44 / 96

96
4.2.2 Equipment provisioning

General equipping rules


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

According to Fig. 2. and Fig. 3. on page 42:


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

a) in Base Band shelf, units SYSCO, SERV, PSF1 and PSF2 are always equipped

b) the number associated to RRA, MD and PSU groups is related to physical (but not necessarily also
logical) channel (0 9). The same number identifies the associated TRI

PHYSICAL CHANNEL BASE BAND SHELF TR SHELF

0 RRA0 MD0 PSU0 TRI0


1 RRA1 MD1 PSU1 TRI1
.... .... .... .... ....
9 RRA9 MD9 PSU9 TRI9

c) only 8 RRA, MD and PSU groups and the associated TRI can be equipped at most. The slot positions
that must be used depend on the system configuration; in particular:

1) with single polarization configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups must be equipped in
the logical number sequence 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 (see Fig. 6. on page 47).

Thus, in these configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups 8 and 9 are never equipped, as
depicted in Fig. 4. herebelow;




S
S R R R R R R M R M R M R M R M


Y M M M M M
E R R R R R R D R D R D R D R D
D


S R D D D D
A A A A A A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9
C V 0 1 2 3 4


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
O




P P P P P P P P P P P P


S S S S S S S S S S S S
F U U U U U U U U U U F
1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 2
UNITS



NEVER
EQUIPPED

T T T T T T T T

T T


R R R R R R R R R R
I


I I I I I I I I I
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9



1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 4. Layout of max 8 channels in single polarization configurations

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 45 / 96

96
2) with double polarization configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups must be equipped in
the sequence 0, 8, .... (see Fig. 7. on page 48, Fig. 8. on page 49 and Fig. 9. on page 49).

Thus, in these configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups 4 and 5 are never equipped, as

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


depicted in Fig. 5. herebelow;

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
S



S R R R R R R M R M R M R M R M
Y M M M M M
R R R R D R D R D R D R D


E R R
S R D D D D D
A A A A A A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9


C V 0 1 2 3 4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


P
S
P
S
P
S
P
S
P
S

P
S
P
S
P
S
P
S
P
S
P
S
P
S


F U U U U U U U U U U F


1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2
UNITS


NEVER
EQUIPPED

T T T T
T T T T T T


R R R R R R R R R R


I I I I I I I I I I


0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


Fig. 5. Layout of max 8 channels in double polarization configurations

d) in the unused slots, dummy plates mus be equipped to ensure EMC performance as well as
equipment correct ventilation;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 46 / 96

96
Channel provisioning/expansion guideline

a) If the branching unit utilizes a single polarization, the transceivers and the branching unit will be
added using the slots starting from left and going toward the right side of the subrack, as shown in
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

the next Fig. 6.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The maximum channel number depends on the channel plan. In every case the maximum number
of transceiver that can be housed in the subrack is 8.
The slot used for the protection transceiver (slot 1) is fixed and it is the first on the left of the subrack.
The example reported in the figure is limited to 4 channels.

1+1/2+0 configuration expansion to 2+1/3+0 expansion to 3+1/4+0

H (V)

Fig. 6. Single polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 47 / 96

96
b) If the branching unit utilizes two antenna polarizations , the transceivers and the branching unit
will be added installing them stating from the side walls and filling the subrack going toward the
subrack centre, in position left or right depending on the polarization of each transceiver, as shown
in the next figure.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


The slot used for the protection transceiver (slot 1) is fixed and it is the first on the left of the subrack.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
So, the antenna polarization of the radio channel used for protection (H or V) defines which branching
(H or V) will be installed at the left side of the rack. For the above reason, it is important to keep
in mind that H or V positions are not strictly associated to the left or right side of the subrack.
The maximum channel number depends on the channel plan.
The example reported in Fig. 7. is limited to 4 channels. It refers to a system with spare channel on
H antenna polarization and, consequently, with transceivers and branching connected to H
polarization on the left side of the subrack.

1+1/2+0 configuration expansion to 2+1/3+0 expansion to 3+1/4+0


(adding 1 RT on V pol) (adding 1 RT on H pol)

1 2 1 4 2 1 5 2 4

H V H V V H H V V

2 2 4 2 4

1 1 1 5
V

Fig. 7. Two polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with the H channels
on the left side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 48 / 96

96
c) The next Fig. 8. shows the other possibility, in which the spare channel (2) utilizes the V polarization
and, consequently, the transceivers and branching are connected to V polarization and are
installed on the left side of the subrack.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1+1/2+0 configuration expansion to 2+1/3+0 expansion to 3+1/4+0


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

(1 RT on H pol and (adding 1 RT on V pol) (adding 1 RT on V pol)


1 RT on V pol)

2 3 2 4 3 2 4 6 3

V H V V H V V V H

H 2 2 4 2 4 6

V 3 3 3

Fig. 8. 2 polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with V channel on the
left side

The above figure shows only two of the possible expansions that depend on the mixing of (H) and
(V) transceivers that must be utilized.

d) The next Fig. 9. gives an example of the installation of the units in case of frequency reuse technique
utilization in a 7+1 protected terminal. At first, the terminal utilizes the first 4 channels (with channel
4 V as spare channel). The successive expansion of the system is performed adding the channels
working on the same frequencies but transmitted on the opposite antenna polarization.

3+1/4+0 configuration 7+1/8+0 configuration

4 2 3 1 4 2 1 3 4 2 3 1

V V H H V V V V H H H H

1 2 3 4

H 2 4

V 1 3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 9. Expansion procedure with reused channels

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 49 / 96

96
Fans provisioning

a) FANS SHELF provisioning

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Presently, there can be either one or two FAN shelves, see Fig. 1. on page 41:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
FAN shelf for RRA/MODEM is mandatory in all configurations

FAN shelf for 1650SMC is mandatory whenever the 1650SMC shelf is equipped.

b) FANS ASSEMBLED provisioning

The FANS SHELF contains one or two independent FANS ASSEMBLED units, as depicted in
following Fig. 10. :




FANSL FANSL
B

1 2

Fig. 10. Fan shelf (slot numbering and board types)

The equipping rules for FANS assembled unit in Basebandshelf are depicted in Tab. 10. below:

Tab. 10. Equipping rules for FANS assembled unit in Basebandshelf

E= equipped
NE = not equipped

POLARIZATION CONFIGURATION FANSLA FANSLB

up to
E NE
single polarization 2+1 / 3+0
(see Fig. 6. on page 47)
3+1 / 4+0 E E

two antenna polarizations


all E E
(see Fig. 7. on page 48)

As far as the ADMshelfs FANSshelf is concerned, only one FAN ASSEMBLED unit is envisaged
(FANSL B, on the rack right side).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 50 / 96

96
4.3 ECT and RECT

ECT
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ALCATEL TMN management products 1320 CT called Craft Terminals (CT) consists of a compatible
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

personal computer and application software specially developed for monitoring transmission
equipment. The CT designed to monitor a single transmission equipment is called Equipment Craft
Terminal (ECT) or 1320 CT.
For each station an ALCATEL proprietary Software Package (SWP) is to be employed:
SWP REG. 9600LSY for the Regenerator station
and, additionally, SWP 1650SMC for the WMSN station.

The Equipment Craft Terminal, connected to the F interface of the Equipment Controller, enable an
operator to perform locally the following Element Management functions:
Equipment Management
Transmission Management
Test management
External points management
Alarm (fault) management
Synchronization management
Radio Management
Performance Monitoring Management
Event log manager
Overhead Management
Connection Management
Software Management
Communication and Routing Management
Security Management
Support Management

RECT

The Remote Equipment Craft Terminal is a feature only present in the Single NE Link architecture
which allows the local operator, using an ECT connected to the F interface of the Equipment
Controller, to zoom and perform a complete set of management operations on all the reachable SDH
NEs in the SDH.
The Remote NE can be physically reached through QB3/Qecc.
The Remote Craft Terminal feature applies in NR5 to both Q3 and QB3* NEs, with the exception of
DXC. The feature is basically the same as for NR3 NEs, with the usual difference related to the
support of TSDIM interface for the management of Q3 NEs.
Despite the fact that this is supposed to be a NE related feature, it becomes a network feature
considering that the network can be composed of both Q3 and QB3* NEs and that an harmonization
is necessary between the two technologies.
The IMCT is able to manage both Q3 and QB3* NEs (in the sense that both QB3* and Q3 application
are working simultaneously), but it shall be connected to a Q3 NE. Viceversa Nectas CT will keep
on being able to manage only QB3* NEs, and it shall obviously be connected to a QB3* NE.
Its worth reminding that RECT can be connected to any NE pertaining to the same area of the local
NE and to any NE pertaining to different areas (assuming that the DCN network has been correctly
designed and hence interarea communication is possible from networking viewpoint).
As far as DXC is concerned, the RECT feature is not supported, i.e. a DXC CT can be connected
to only one DXC at a time.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 51 / 96

96
Of course, due to the limitation of the physical resources in the Equipment Controller of the NE, some
network design constraints must be taken into account as the total number of managed NEs (64),
the number of the QB3 NEs (32), the number of the QB3* NEs (32), the number of associations
permanently open (31) between the CT and the remote NEs.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The RECT features and limitations are briefly the following:

1) The RECT function provides a remote login facility similar to those offered by an OS to manage
several configured NEs, included the local one.
2) The contemporaneous presence of the RECT function and an OS is possible. The access
disable flag avoids access conflict between the OS and both RECT and ECT on some
operations as configuration modification and remote control with access filtering.
3) The NE which may be remotely controlled by a RECT must be configured and must be loaded
with the same SW version supporting the RECT function. A NE not supporting RECT function
shall refuse the incoming association issued by a RECT and the ECT displays only local
information.
4) Only three RECTs shall be active at a time over one NE. The coexistence of ECTs and RECTs
in the whole network is guaranteed since the conflict in configuring the QB3 NEs is solved locally
by the NE itself.
5) The operator, through the RECT function, is able to see the alarm synthesis of the whole
network .
6) In a SDH network the maximum number of QB3 NEs equipped with the RECT function are 32
and the maximum number of NEs (QB3* NEs and QB3 NEs) manageable by the RECT function
are 64. These figures identify what it is understood as small SDH network for which the RECT
function may substitute the Element Manager.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 52 / 96

96
5 ALLOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND CRAFT TERMINAL SOFTWARE

5.1 EquipmentOperator interfaces and local software allocation


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

5.1.1 LHR

Following Fig. 11. , taken from 9600LSY/LHR Technical Handbook (as well as Fig. 15. page 58), sums
up main EquipmentOperator interfaces:

CMI 9 RRA SW RFCOH MD TR

DCCR
WST 2Mb/s

RRA SW RFCOH MD TR

DCCR

WST 2Mb/s

CMI 1 RRA SW RFCOH MD TR

DCCR
DCCR

ECT F
EOW
DCCR 64 Kb
QB3 SC SERVICE WST 2Mb/s
OS

DCCR
DCCR

CMI 0 MD TR
RRA RFCOH
DISTRIB.

RADIO
PROTECTION

Fig. 11. LHR system (N+1 / N+0)


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 53 / 96

96
Fig. 12. on page 55 roughly depicts the LHR main parts containing the local SW and the interfaces with
the Operator:
a) Interfaces:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


The LHR NE can be controlled by the OS (e.g. Alcatel 1353SH) through the Q interface.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
ECT (Equipment Craft Terminal, briefly Craft Terminal) can be connected to the LHR unit
through a RS232 interface (F interface, see Fig. 13. on page 56).
b) Local software allocation
Once the system has been configured and activated (as explained in following chapters), Equipment
and Craft Terminal must not necessarily be left connected, because equipment contains all the
software necessary for its working.
This equipments local software comprises programs and configuration data. Programs and data are
managed differently from each other:

1) ESC: Equipment Controller SYSCO

Whole Equipment SW (programs and configuration data) is contained in the Flash Card housed
in SYSCO boards ESCON subunit (the Flash Card contains also the software (programs and
configuration data) relevant to the peripheral units, i.e., in the figure, SERVICE, RRAs,
MODEMs and RTs). See Fig. 13. and Fig. 14. on page 56.
This flash card is removable (i.e. replaceable), and the programs can be overwritten by a SW
download from CT (through F interface) or Network Management Operation System (through
Q interface) to SYSCO.
More precisely, the Flash Card contains two independent instances of the Equipment SW
programs (one active, the other standby) so that the above cited SW download is actually done
toward the standby instance, while equipment goes on working with the SW programs of the
active instance. Swapping between the two instances is done only under Operators request.

2) Peripheral Units

Peripheral units (SERVICE, RRAs, MODEMs, RTs, as well SYSCO itself) contain their own local
SW (programs and configuration data), housed in a local Flash Eprom (physically not
removable). The programs in this local Flash Eprom can be overwritten by means of a SW
download from the Equipment Controller (SYSCO) with the same activestandby duplication
described before for SYSCO (SYSCO can also decide autonomously to download the
programs in Supervisory Units Flash Eprom of the Peripheral Units).

3) Equipment Configuration Data

As explained before, whole Equipment configuration data (together with programs) is contained
in SYSCO boards ESCON subunit Flash Card. Most (but not all) configuration data set is
named MIB and can be saved as a file in the Craft Terminal (or OS) environment, as well can
be restored in the Flash Card retrieving this file from the Craft Terminal (or OS).
Data that cannot be saved/restored are those relevant to network routing, that is, according to
the Craft Terminal Men:

Configuration Comm.Routing
Local Configuration
OS Configuration
NTP Server Configuration
LAPD Configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Ethernet Configuration
RAP Configuration
MESA Configuration.

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 54 / 96

96
ESC
ESCON SUBUNIT
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

F EQUIPMENT FLASH
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Q CONTROLLER CARD

RADIO CONTROLLER RAM


SUPERVISOR UNIT

ESC RAM
SUPERVISOR UNIT

CANBUS SERVICE
SERVICE FLASH
SUPERVISOR UNIT EPROM

RRA0
RRA FLASH
SUPERVISOR UNIT EPROM

MODEM0
MODEM FLASH
SUPERVISOR UNIT EPROM

RT0
RT FLASH
SUPERVISOR UNIT EPROM

RRAn
RRA FLASH
SUPERVISOR UNIT EPROM

MODEMn
MODEM FLASH
SUPERVISOR UNIT EPROM

RTn
RT FLASH
SUPERVISOR UNIT EPROM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 12. Equipment main parts containing local SW (LHR)

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 55 / 96

96
Fig. 13. herebelow shows the System Controller assembly view

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Fig. 14. herebelow shows the FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Subunit
ESCON

Flash Card
F INTERFACE System Controller
main board

Fig. 13. System Controller assembly

TOP SIDE

INSERTION

Fig. 14. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 56 / 96

96
5.2 OperatorEquipment Interaction

1) Local Operator can manage Equipment software programs and most configuration data
through the Equipment Craft Terminal 1320CT attached to F interface (see Fig. 12. on page
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

55 and Fig. 13. on page 56).


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The Craft Terminal characteristics (computer configuration) are listed in chapter 3 on page 33.
The Craft Terminal is a project in charge of the local management of single network elements,
providing ITU compliant Information Model Interface to the Network Element.
Multiple NE management up to 32 Network element is possible obtaining a remote Craft
Terminal application.

The general information of the Craft Terminal are presented in the:

1320CT Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook

that the operator have to read before this Handbook.


In this Handbook are described all the general description of use, navigation, rules, etc.,
common to all the NE using the same Craft Terminal.
Furthermore, the same handbook contains the detailed description of common operations as
Installation and common screens as Network Element Synthesis view.
The Network Element Synthesis view is the first view presented to the operator entering the
application.
Starting from this view it is possible login the NE and than enter the EMLUSM views.
This Operators Handbook deals with the EMLUSM views of the Craft Terminal, which directly
allows to manage the Network Element.

A detailed description of the LHRs EMLUSM screens is given in the dedicated Section of this
handbook:

LHR Ne Management

2) A further SW application, also available in the PC and OS environment and named SIBDL
(Standard Image Binary Download), deals with SW download in special cases, which are
detailed in the following. The physical interface for running this application from Craft Terminal
is F interface.

The installation and use of SIBDL is detailed in the dedicated Section of this handbook:

SIBDL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 57 / 96

96
5.2.1 WMSN

Fig. 15. sums up main EquipmentOperator interfaces in the WMSN configuration.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
CMI 7

DCCR
WST 2Mb/s

RRA SW RFCOH MD TR

DCCR
WST 2Mb/s

1650SMC
CMI 2 RRA SW RFCOH MD TR

CMI 1
DCCR
DCCR

CMI 0
F EOW
DCCR 64 Kb
QB3 SC SERVICE WST 2Mb/s

Nx64
Kb DCCR
DCCR

RRA RFCOH MD TR
DISTRIB.

ECT OS RADIO
PROTECTION

Fig. 15. WMSN system (N+1 / N+0)

From the Infomodel point of view and consequently in any equipment operation and maintenance
operation, in all WMSN configurations takes always into account that LHR and 1650SMC are two different
Network Elements.

As depicted in Fig. 15. , in any WMSN configuration the standard Q and F interfaces (as well as those of
the service channels) are those provided by MUXs Equipment Controller. The dialogue between
Equipment Controllers of MUX and LHR (allowing regenerator SW management from OS or ECT attached
to MUXs Equipment Controller) is performed through the DCC channel of STM1 link existing between
MUX and LHR.
This is true for Equipment Craft Terminal standard applications, as well as for SIBDL application.

For the detailed description of the 1650SMC EMLUSM screens please refer to the 1650SMC handbooks.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 58 / 96

96
6 GENERAL ON SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND MANAGEMENT

This chapter introduces the basic information regarding the software management, with particular
emphasis on SWP versions and release upgrading situations and special troubleshooting situations.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

N.B. Before reading this chapter, it is suggested to read (if not yet done) previous chapter 5 on page
53.

Fig. 16. depicts the main phases for SW management.


SWP
CDROM

1) SWP LOADING IN PC
MSNT ENVIRONMENT

6) MIB 2) NEW SWP


BACKUP INSTALLATION
CRAFT TERMINAL

3) NE SWP LOADING
INTO EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
(if necessary)

DURATION
2 hours ABOUT
S
Y 4) SW DOWNLOAD
S
C TO SUPERVISOR UNITS
O (if necessary)
5) NE CONFIG.
DATA MNGT DURATION
5 minutes ABOUT
7) MIB
RESTORE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 16. Software management main phases

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 59 / 96

96
Taking into account that, as previously explained, the SW management should be distinguished into:

program management, i.e.:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


(1) and (2) : SWP loading from CDROM to the Personal Computer, after which the PC

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
becomes and can be used as the Equipment Craft Terminal

(3) NE SWP downloading from ECT toward the NetworkElements Equipment Controller (EC)

(4) SW downloading from EC toward peripheral Supervisor Units (SU).

NE configuration data management:

(5) NE configuration data definition

(6) NE configuration data save in Equipment Craft Terminal (MIB backup)

(7) NE configuration data restore from Equipment Craft Terminal (MIB restore, if necessary)

purpose of this chapter is to give summary information about software management in the various
situations.

N.B. Please refer to para.12.2.2 on page 88 for the meaning of SWP Release, Version and Patch
Level.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 60 / 96

96
6.1 Common situations

1) Network Element(s) already configured with the more recent SWP version and Craft
Terminal already available.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

ECT NE
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

ECT release = NE release


A.B.c ECT version = NE version A.B.c

This is the typical situation of new installations: the Network Element SW configuration matches
the available Craft Terminal SWP version, so that the NE can be loggedin and the Operator
can carry out the required operations, without any preliminary actions.

2) Network Element(s) already configured with the more recent SWP version, but the Craft
Terminal is not available or has a version older with respect to that of the Network
Element(s).
ECT NE
ECT release = NE release
A.B.c ECT version < NE version A.B.d

In this case, carry out SWP installation in Craft Terminal environment as explained in para.8.4
on page 66. After that, the situation is equal to that of point 1 ) above.

3) Network Element(s) already configured with a SWP release older than that present in the
Craft Terminal.
ECT NE
ECT release > NE release
B.B.x versions unmeaningful A.A.y

Refer to chapter 10 on page 71.


After that, the situation is equal to that of point 1 ) above.

4) Both Network Element(s) and Craft Terminal already configured with a SWP release older
than that made available by the a new SWP RELEASE.

ECT NE
running release < SWP release SWP
CDROM
A.B.c = A.B.c patch levels unmeaningful D.E.f

Refer to chapter 10 on page 71.


After that, the situation is equal to that of point 1 ) above.

5) Both Network Element(s) and Craft Terminal already configured with a SWP version
older than that made available by the a new SWP version (SAME RELEASE)

ECT NE
running release = SWP release SWP
CDROM
A.B.c = A.B.c running version < SWP version
A.B.d

This could be the typical situation of installations already running with A.B SWP package
(e.g.1.0.6), in the case a newer version of the same A.B SWP package has to be installed
(e.g.1.0.8).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Refer to chapter 9 on page 71.


After that, the situation is equal to that of point 1 ) above.

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 61 / 96

96
6.2 Troubleshooting situations

a) In the following situations:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


1) Flash Card to be replaced

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
or:

2) NE not infactory configured

use the SW download through SIBDL program (refer to the specific section in this handbook):

SIBDL

b) In the following situation:

3) there are symptoms of MIB data corruption in the NE Flash Card

proceed as specified on para.6.3 on page 63, taking into account that step a ) (SW download) could
be not strictly necessary.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 62 / 96

96
6.3 SW download with MIB reset on the Flash Card

This is a special procedure that can be referred to by other parts of this handbook. Use it only if
specifically referenced.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

a) Perform a SW download as explained in chapter Software Management of section LHR Ne


Management in this manual, i.e. , after having loggedin the NE, according to the Craft Terminal
Men:

Download Init download

then, after about 2 hours, Commit , to select the version to be written on the Flash Card

b) Extract the Equipment controller card SYSCO.

On SYSCOs subunit ESCON (see Fig. 13. on page 56) there is one 4switch DIPSwitch bank, all
normally set in off position. The switch 2 allows the reset of MIB.
For the position of these dipswitches, see section:

UNIT HW PRESETTING of 9600LSY/LHR Technical Handbook

c) Set switch 2 to ON position.

d) Reinsert the Equipment Controller card and wait about 2 minutes for ESCON restart: in this situation
MIB structure is reset to a default configuration.

e) Extract again the Equipment controller card and set switch 2 to OFF position.

f) Reinsert the Equipment Controller card and wait about 2 minutes for ESCON restart.

g) Configure the equipment data:

by Craft Terminal, with individual commands

or, always by Craft Terminal:

restoring MIB data base previously saved, as indicated in dedicated sections of this
handbook:

LHR Ne Management , chapter MIB management

and manually reconfiguring network configuration data not saved in MIB (ref. point 3 ) on
page 54).

h) Switch off and (after 10 seconds) switch on equipment.

i) Perform all necessary checks.

j) Save Equipment Configuration Data as explained in para.8.7 point 2 ) on page 70.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 63 / 96

96
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.1:INTRODUCTION
7 HARDWARE INSTALLATION

Hardware installation must be done according to:

9600LSY/LHR Installation Handbook

96
3DB 02838 AA AA
64 / 96
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
8 SWP INSTALLATION ON A NEW SYSTEM

This chapter details all phases necessary to install for the first time a SWP in the PC environment as well
as in the equipment environment.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

N.B. Before starting the installation procedures, it is suggested to give a look to previous chapters
5 on page 53 and 6 on page 59.

8.1 PC hardware characteristics

Refer to SWP DESCRIPTION (para.3.1.1 on page 33).

8.2 Operator skills

The operator shall be familiar with the use of personal computers in WINDOWSNT or WINDOWS 2000
environment, internally to which the Network Elements application software operates.

Furthermore, for a number of configuration applications, the operator shall be aware of some
specifications of the International Standard Organization (ISO) and of the standards applied to the
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) (CCITT Recommendations).

8.3 Summary of SW installation phases

The sequence of installation phases are as follows:

a) SWP loading in PC WINDOWSNT environment (PC is disconnected from Equipment Controller):

1) installation of 1320CT + NE software from SWP CDROM

2) installation of SIBDL program from SWP CDROM

3) end of SW installation from SWP CDROM

4) Craft Terminal configuration

5) NE Profile management

6) NE software downloading preparation

b) SW download toward NE (PC is connected to Equipment Controller):

7) dipswitch check

8) warning about ANTP (Alcatel Network Time Protocol)

9) LHR SW download

c) Commissioning

d) Configuration data definition and save


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 65 / 96

96
8.4 SWP loading in PC WINDOWSNT environment (offline mode)

8.4.1 Installation of 1320CT + NE software from SWP CDROM

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
1) Insert the SWP CDROM in the PCs CDROM unit:

a) the autoinstallation process starts with the installation of 1320CT basic platform software
product, meant to reside in PC environment only, with the aim of interfacing the NEs and
allowing their management.

b) when so requested by the installation procedure, confirm all default values (N.B.)

c) the autoinstallation process continues with the installation of NE own Software


Package(s):

1) SWP REG. 9600LSY


that includes:
LHR Equipment Controller SW Components
LHR Radio Controller SW Components
LHR File Descriptor (for SW Download).

d) when so requested by the installation procedure, confirm all default values (N.B.)

N.B. These phases are fully detailed, together with the various options, in:

1320CT Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook ,


section INSTALLATION

WARNING: the cited section is NEtype independent, so you do not find 9600LSY
specific screens but example screens; nevertheless you should not find problems
in understanding the option meanings, that are valid for all NE types.

e) when so requested by the installation procedure, confirm all default values.

More information about 9600LSY software package(s) are given in SWP DESCRIPTION (chapter
3 on page 33).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 66 / 96

96
8.4.2 Installation of SIBDL program from SWP CDROM

Refer to chapter 5 for general information on SIBDL program (in particular point 5.2 2 ) on page 57 and
point 6.2 2 ) on page 62).
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The SIBDL program is not automatically installed by the autoinstallation process described in para.8.4.1
(page 66).

The installation of SIBDL is detailed in the dedicated Section of this handbook:

SIBDL

N.B. It is not mandatory to install SIBDL in this phase. You can postpone it when necessary (take into
account that you will need the SWP CDROM).

8.4.3 End of SW installation from SWP CDROM

Having reached this phase, you have finished the Software transfer from SWP CDROM to the PC
environment. Now, you can extract the SWP CDROM from the PCs CDROM unit.

8.4.4 Craft Terminal configuration

This procedure is necessary to configure the PC in order to manage the Network Elements and includes
the following types of configuration:
PC hostname
CT configuration
Communication Protocol (TCP/IP):
TCP/IP without a network card
TCP/IP with a network card
Switching between the two configurations
Serial Communication with the NE
Screen settings

In order to setup these configurations, refer to:

1320CT Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook ,


section INSTALLATION, chapter Craft Terminal Configuration

8.4.5 NE Profile management

This management allows to define the operator profiles (username + password) in order to access all the
Craft Terminal functionality or only limited parts of it.

In order to setup these configurations, refer to:

1320CT Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook ,


section GETTING STARTED, chapter Access to the main functionalities,
paragraph NE Profile management
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B. This phase is not necessary to going on with the installation. If necessary, it can be done when
decided.

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 67 / 96

96
8.4.6 NE software downloading preparation

N.B. This description is retrieved from 1320CT Basic Operators Handbook, section EML
construction, chapter Administrating files, paragraph Software Administration and is

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


repeated here for ease of operation.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
This phase must be manually carried out by the Operator and has the scope of making the new equipment
software package available for its downloading toward the equipment controller and the peripheral units.

This operation is independent from the NE management state and must be executed with the following
procedure:
1) From the Supervision pull down menu select the File Administration and then the Software
Administration option, as shown in Fig. 17. herebelow.

Fig. 17. Selecting Software Administration

2) In the figure that opens (see Fig. 18. herebelow as an example) select the directory where the
NE software package is installed: Alcatel / usm / ect / swdw / <equipment name> / <version>
/ <descriptor file>.
The NE software package can also be selected from the CDROM used for the installation of
the NE software. In this case, after inserting the CDROM in the driver, choose the following:
ect / swdw / <equipment name> / <version> / <descriptor file>.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 18. Directory selection

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 68 / 96

96
3) Click on Open to activate the installation file selected. At the end of the process, a confirmation
message is displayed.

4) At this point the NE Software Package is installed in another directory and available to be
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

downloaded on the Network Element.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

8.5 SW download toward NE (online mode)

8.5.1 Dipswitch check

If not yet done, verify that the setting of dipswitches is consistent with the equipment configuration. See
para.3.1.6 on page 35.

8.5.2 Warning about ANTP (Alcatel Network Time Protocol)

For ANTP description refer to:

1320CT Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook,


section EML Construction, chapter Using Craft Terminal Environment ,
paragraph ANTP Configuration

The ANTP default state is Enable Client. In this situation, when you connect the PC to the equipments
Finterface, start 1320CT program and execute the log in, the PC gets the time information from the
equipment. If this time information is incorrect, WindowsNT (that accepts years only in the range
19802023), could go into unexpected states.

In order to avoid problems, if you are not sure of the NE Network Time, it is suggested to disable the ANTP
function with the following operations, with the PC disconnected from the NE Network:

1) activate ECT (1320CT x.x.x)


2) activate ANTP configuration window ( CT Environment ANTP configuration )
3) select option NOT Managed
4) Confirm with Save and OK

After having connected to the NE Network, the Operator should decide what to do with ANTP (disabled,
Client, Server).

8.5.3 LHR SW download

1) Through the suitable cable, connect the PC to F interface of SYSCO board


2) Activate ECT (1320CT x.x.x)
3) Execute the Login of LHR NE
4) Perform the SW download, as explained in this manual:

LHR Ne Management, chapter Software Management

i.e. , after having loggedin the NE, according to the Craft Terminal Men:
a) Download Init download (selecting the NEversion to be downloaded)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

b) then, after about 2 hours, Download Unit Info Activate to activate software.

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 69 / 96

96
8.6 Commissioning

The commissioning instructions are given in:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
9600LSY/LHR Line Up Guide

8.7 Configuration data definition and save

The instructions given in the handbook cited in para.8.6 do not include the definition of all the Equipment
configuration data that could be necessary.

1) Data definition
In order to manage this data, refer to the sections in this handbook:

LHR Ne Management

2) Data save
In any case, after having completed the Equipment Configuration, the Operator should save the
relevant data:

through the MIB backup, as described in this handbook in section:

LHR Ne Management , chapter Software Management,


para. MIB management

writing somewhere data that are not saved by MIB backup (see point 3 ) on page 54).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 70 / 96

96
9 NEW SWP VERSION INSTALLATION (SAME SWP RELEASE)
This chapter details all phases necessary to install a new SWP version in the PC environment as well
as in the equipment environment.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

This procedure can be used only in the case depicted in point 5 ) on page 61, i.e.:
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

ECT and equipment are running with one of the Software Packages with P/N indicated in Tab. 4. on
page 31 and with generic version A.B.c (A.B is the SW release, c is the patch level)
a new version of SWP A.B.d (d > c), having the same P/N, is delivered to Customer.

DO NOT USE THIS PROCEDURE TO UPDATE


FROM OLDER TO NEW SWP RELEASE

Procedure:
1) Carry out the installation of the new SWP version in the ECT environment, as indicated in
para.8.4 on page 66.
2) The subsequent phases depend on the compatibility of MIB structure between previous and
new SWP versions. This MIB compatibility is indicated in the suitable paragraph of chapter 3
in this document.
N.B.1 Usually the MIB structure is fully compatible inside a SWP Release, so that the
following case a ) must be taken into consideration.
N.B.2 The indication given in the paragraph is relevant to the version stated in para.3.1.2
(page 34). In case you receive a version higher than that stated, please refer to the
documentation accompanying the SWP delivery to get this information.
a) new MIB structure compatible with old MIB structure
Perform a SW download as explained in chapter Software Management of section LHR
Ne Management in this manual, i.e. , after having loggedin the NE, according to the Craft
Terminal Men:
Download Init download (selecting the version to be downloaded)
then, after about 2 hours, Download Unit Info Activate to swap between
the older and the newer versions.
The result is to have the Equipment working with the new SWP version nevertheless
maintaining the old configuration data.
b) new MIB structure not compatible with old MIB structure
Proceed as specified on para.6.3 on page 63, taking into account that in step g ) equipment
data configuration must be carried out by individual commands only.

10 SWP UPGRADING FROM A PREVIOUS SWP RELEASE


This chapter details all phases necessary to install a new SWP release in the PC environment as well
as in the equipment environment.
This procedure must be used only in the case depicted in point 4 ) on page 61.

Procedure not presently envisaged (this is the first SWP release).


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 71 / 96

96
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.1:INTRODUCTION

96
3DB 02838 AA AA
72 / 96
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

APPENDICES
SECTION CONTENT PAGE

Chapter 11 ECTEquipment connection via public switched telephone


75
network

Chapter 12 Documentation guide 83


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 73 / 96

96
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.1:INTRODUCTION

96
3DB 02838 AA AA
Refer to para.1.4 on page 14 for an overview of the scopes and contents of this part.

74 / 96
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
11 ECTEQUIPMENT CONNECTION VIA PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE
NETWORK
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

11.1 Introduction
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

This chapter explains the operations necessary to allow the remote connection to the FInterface, from
a local PC configurated as ECT, through a switched telephone line of the standard Public Telephone
Network, as shown in Fig. 19. here below.

This kind of remote control is possible for a single equipment as well as for a whole subnetwork (reachable
from the main equipment through DCC and/or LAN).

 


F Interface
Port COM


 

Local Remote
  Modem
Modem

Fig. 19. ECTEquipment connection via Public Switched Telephone Network

11.2 Certified modems

The connection has been successfully tested with the following types of modems:

a) Modem Sportster Flash (US Robotics)

b) Modem TD32 AC (Westermo Teleindustri AB)

and with the following local/remote combinations:

Local Modem Remote Modem

Sportster Flash
Sportster Flash
TD 32 AC

TD 32 AC
TD 32 AC
Sportster Flash
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Testing the connection with different types of modems is fully on Customers charge.

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 75 / 96

96
11.3 Connection cables

In the following figures, the cables for the connections are described:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
PC/ECT (DTE) Local Modem (DCE)
Cannon 9 pins female Cannon 25 pins male

DCD 1 8 DCD
TD 2 3 TD
RD 3 2 RD
DTR 4 4 RTS
DSR 6 5 CTS
RTS 7 6 DSR
CTS 8 20 DTR
GND 5 7 GND

Fig. 20. ECTLocal Modem cable

Remote Modem (DCE) F Interface (DCE)


Cannon 25 pins male Cannon 9 pins male

TD 2 3 TD
RD 3 2 RD
RTS 4 7 RTS
CTS 5 8 CTS
DSR 6 6 DSR
CTS 20 4 DTR
GND 7 5 GND

Fig. 21. F InterfaceRemote Modem cable


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 76 / 96

96
11.4 Modem setting

11.4.1 Sportster Flash Modem setting


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

This modem requires only a SW setting via serial port.

There is a little difference between local and remote modems setting (refer to Fig. 19. on page 75 for the
distinction between local and remote), relevant to the autoanswer option that must be set in the remote
modem and not set in the local modem.

LOCAL MODEM SETTING

To set the local modem, proceed as follows:

1) Connect the local modem to the PC/ECT with the cable of Fig. 20. on page 76.

2) Power and switch on the local modem.

3) On the PC, activate program HyperTerminal and configure the PCModem serial line with the
following parameters:

* Bits per second: 38400


* Data Bits: 8
* Parity: None
* Stop Bit: 1
* Flow control: None

4) Execute and store the modem setup, writing the following commands in the HyperTerminal
program window:

AT&F1<Return> (Best PC default configuration recall)


ATT<Return> (Tone Dialling instead than Pulse Dialling)
ATX3<Return> (Second Signal disabling, avoids problems with PABX)
AT&W0<Return> (Configuration store in NVRAM 0)

5) Now, setting has been completed. Modem can be switched off and disconnected, if necessary.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 77 / 96

96
N.B. For confirmation, the modem configuration can be checked writing the command
ATI4<Return> in the HyperTerminal program window.
Information displayed should be as follows:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


ATI4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
U.S. Robotics Sportster Flash 56000 Settings...

B0 E1 F1 L2 M1 Q0 V1 X3 Y0
BAUD=38400 PARITY=N WORDLEN=8
DIAL=TONE OFF LINE CID=0

&A3 &B1 &C1 &D2 &H1 &I0 &K1


&M4 &N0 &P0 &R2 &S0 &T5 &U0 &Y1

S00=000 S01=000 S02=043 S03=013 S04=010 S05=008 S06=004


S07=060 S08=002 S09=006 S10=014 S11=072 S12=050 S13=000
S15=000 S16=000 S18=000 S19=000 S21=010 S22=017 S23=019
S25=005 S27=001 S28=008 S29=020 S30=000 S31=128 S32=002
S33=000 S34=000 S35=000 S36=014 S38=000 S39=012 S40=000
S41=004 S42=000

LAST DIALED #:

REMOTE MODEM SETTING

To set the remote modem, proceed as follows:

a) carry out same steps 1 ) , 2 ) , 3 ) as for local modem setting

b) execute and store the modem setup, writing in the HyperTerminal program window the same
commands described in step 4 ) for the local modem setting, and adding the following command:

ATS=1<Return> (Autoanswering setting)

c) now, setting has been completed. Modem can be switched off and disconnected, if necessary.

N.B. For confirmation, the modem configuration can be checked writing the command
ATI4<Return> in the HyperTerminal program window.
Information displayed should be equal to that displayed for the local modem, with only the
difference for field S00:

S00=001 S01=000 S02=043 S03=013 S04=010 S05=008 S06=004


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 78 / 96

96
11.4.2 TD32 AC Modem setting

This modem requires an initial HW setup via dipswitches and a SW setting via serial port.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

To set the modem, both local and remote, proceed as follows:


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

1) The initial HW setup via dipswitches is indicated in Fig. 22. herebelow:

ON ON ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4
SW3 SW2 SW1

ON ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW5 SW4

Fig. 22. TD32 AC modem dipswitch setting

2) Connect the local modem to the PC/ECT with the cable of Fig. 20. on page 76.

3) Power on the local modem (there is no an ON/OFF switch).

4) On the PC, activate program HyperTerminal and configure the PCModem serial line with the
following parameters:

* Bits per second: 38400


* Data Bits: 8
* Parity: None
* Stop Bit: 1
* Flow control: None

5) Execute and store the modem setup, writing the following commands in the HyperTerminal
program window:

AT&F1<Return> (Best PC default configuration recall)


AT&K0<Return> (DTE/DCE flow control disabling)
ATA<Return> (Automatic Answer enabling > Only on Remote modem and
wait the message NO CARRIER)
AT&W0<Return> (Configuration store in NVRAM 0)
AT&Y0<Return> (Configuration Set to load at switchon: NVRAM 0)

6) Now, setting has been completed. Modem can be switched off and disconnected, if necessary.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 79 / 96

96
N.B. For confirmation, the modem configuration can be checked writing the command
AT\S<Return> in the HyperTerminal program window.
Information displayed should be as follows:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


AT\S

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
CMD DESCRIPTION / OPTION CMD DESCRIPTION / OPTION CMD DESCRIPTION / OPTION

COUNTRY...........IT &A CHR ABORT OPT.....NO *H NEG. SPEED......HIGH
DTE BPS........38400 &B DTR DIAL OPTION...NO S0 RINGS TO ANS.....002
DTE PARITY.....8NONE &C DCD OPTION........ON S1 RING COUNT.......000
LINE SPEED......NONE &D DTR OPTION.........0 S2 <ESC> CHAR.......043
B BELL MODE........OFF &G GUARD TONE......NONE S3 <CR> CHAR........013
E CMD ECHO..........ON &K FLOW CONTROL....NONE S4 <LF> CHAR........010
F LINE MODE.......AUTO &L NETWORK.........PSTN S5 <BS> CHAR........008
L SPKR VOLUME......LOW &Q ASYNC/SYNC.........5 S7 CONNECT TIME.....060
M SPKR CONTROL....CALL &R RTS/CTS.........AUTO S8 PAUSE TIME.......002
N AUTO MODE.........ON &S DSR OPT............0 S12 ESC GUARD TIME...050
Q QUIET............OFF &T ENABLE RDL........NO S30 CONNECT INACT....000
V RESULT FORM.....LONG &X SYNC CLOCK.......INT S32 XON CHAR.........017
W EC MSG.............0 &Y PROFILE........NVM.0 S33 XOFF CHAR........019
X EXT RESULTS........4 \A MAX BLK SIZE.....192 S36 FALLBACK ACTION..007
Y LONG SPACE DISC...NO \G REMOTE FLOW......OFF S37 MODE SELECT......000
%C COMPRESSION.....BOTH \K BRK OPT............5 S48 V42 NEG CTRL.....007
K EXT. SERVICES......0 \N ECL MODE........AUTO S95 RES. CODE........000
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 80 / 96

96
11.5 Setting up the connection

In order to activate the connection and operate the ECT in remote way, proceed as specified herebelow.
Refer to Fig. 19. on page 75 for the distinction between local and remote modems.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

N.B. Leaving the remote modem permanently switched on and permanently connected to
Finterface and telephone line, operations set up by steps 1 ) thru 4 ) , it is possible to access
the equipment in any moment.
In order to access the equipment by local ECT, proceed as specified in steps 5 ) thru 13 ) .
1) Connect the remote modem to equipments F interface with the cable of Fig. 21. on page 76.
2) Connect the remote modem to the telephone line (as far as Sportster Flash model is concerned,
the connector to be used is the nearest to that used for the connection with equipments F
interface and signed with the wall symbol).
3) Power and switch on the remote modem.
4) Be sure remote equipment is switched on and correctly working.
5) Connect the local modem to the PC/ECT (with the cable of Fig. 20. on page 76.) on the serial
port assigned for the connection with F interface (usually COM1).
6) Connect the local modem to the telephone line (as far as Sportster Flash model is concerned,
the connector to be used is the nearest to that used for the connection with equipments F
interface).
7) Power and switch on the local modem.
8) On the PC, activate program HyperTerminal and configure the PCLocal Modem serial line with
the following parameters:

* Bits per second: 38400


* Data Bits: 8
* Parity: None
* Stop Bit: 1
* Flow control: None
9) Execute the telephone call from the PC writing the following command in the HyperTerminal
program window:

ATDnnn<Return>

where nnn is the telephone network number associated to the remote telephone line (that
which the remote modem is connected to).
10 ) Wait the message indicating the successful connection between local and remote modems.

N.B. The message text depends on the modem type, as follows:

CONNECT 14400/ARQ/V32/LAPM/V42BIS (Sportster Flash)


CONNECT 38400 (TD 32 AC)

11 ) Close HyperTerminal program.


12 ) Activate the ECT applicative SW as usual.
13 ) At the end of the job, after having logged out from the ECT applicative SW, close the connection
between local and remote modems, switching off the local modem or physically disconnecting
the cable connecting it to the PC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 81 / 96

96
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.1:INTRODUCTION

96
3DB 02838 AA AA
82 / 96
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
12 DOCUMENTATION GUIDE

This chapter contains all information regarding the Customer Documentation and is organized as follows:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

INFORMATION REGARDING 9600LSY REL.1.0 CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Productreleaseversion handbooks on page 84


gives the list and description of the Customer Documentation set this handbook belongs to.

INFORMATION REGARDING CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION IN GENERAL

General on Alcatel Customer Documentation on page 87


including:

CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation on page 87

Product levels and associated Customer Documentation on page 88

Typical contents of Technical & Craft Terminal Operators Handbooks on page 90

Documentation on paper on page 92

Documentation on CDROM on page 94

Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers on page 96


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 83 / 96

96
12.1 Productreleaseversion handbooks

This paragraph lists and briefly describes the handbooks making up the documentation set envisaged for
9600LSY Rel.1.0 product release

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Please refer to following para.12.2 on page 87 for a general description of Alcatel Customer
Documentation system.

The list of handbooks given here below is valid as at the issue date of this Handbook and
can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.

Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available as at the issue date of this
Handbook.

12.1.1 Specific equipment handbooks and CDROMs

The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose
product-release-version is stated in para.1.2 on page 12 consists of the following handbooks:
Tab. 11. Handbooks related to the specific product hardware

THIS
FACTORY
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. HDBK
Part No.
or NOTE

9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0


3DB 02839 AAAA 955.203.292 Q
Technical Handbook
[A] Provides information regarding Equipment description and composition,
Hardware setting documentation, and Maintenance (together with handbook
REF.[D] )

9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0


3DB 02840 AAAA 955.203.302 S
Installation Handbook
[B]
Provides information regarding Equipment installation, according to Alcatel
Installation Engineering Dept. rules.

9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0


3DB 02841 AAAA 955.203.312 K
Line Up Guide
[C]
Provides information regarding equipment line up, according to Alcatel Installation
Engineering Dept. rules.

Tab. 12. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control

THIS
FACTORY
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. HDBK
Part No.
or NOTE

9600LSY Rel.1.0
3DB 02838 AAAA 957.207.022 A
CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

[D]
Provides 9600LSY screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW
management and maintenance.

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 84 / 96

96
Tab. 13. Handbooks common to all Alcatel Radio Transmission products

THIS
FACTORY
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. HDBK


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Part No.
or NOTE

Interference investigation procedure 3DB 04165 EAAA 955.203.374 Z

[E] Describes the measurement procedure for the interference searching in the various
RF bands used by Alcatel Radio Transmission products.

Tab. 14. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform

THIS
FACTORY
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. HDBK
Part No.
or NOTE

1320CT Version1.3.x
3AL 79186 AAAA 957.130.542 E
Basic Operators Handbook
ED.03
[F]
on
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT
(Craft terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements.

1330AS Rel.5.0
3AL 71079 AAAA 957.130.442 A
Operators Handbook
[G]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm
Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package.

ELM Rel.5.0 Operators Handbook 3AL 71081 AAAA 957.130.462 E

[H]
Provide detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log
Management software embedded in the 1320CT software package.

Tab. 15. Documentation on CDROM

REF CDROM TITLE ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No.

DCP 9600LSY 1.0 CDROM 3DB 02831 AAAA 417.200.017 D

[I] Contains, in electronic format, all handbooks: REF.[A] to [H]


Envisaged after the release of all handbooks
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 85 / 96

96
12.1.2 Related equipment handbooks and CDROMs

12.1.2.1 Handbooks and CDROMs of OPTINEX Rack

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Tab. 16. Handbooks related to the products hardware

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
FACTORY
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No.
Part No.

[J] Optinex Racks Rel.3.0.0 Technical Handbook 3AL 37953 AAAA 955.100.922 C

Tab. 17. Documentation on CDROM

REF CDROM TITLE ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No.

Optinex Racks Rel.3.0 CDROMDOC EN 3AL 37954 AAAA 417.100.026


[K]
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF.[J]

12.1.2.2 Handbooks and CDROMs of 1650SMC

1650SMC has its own:

Technical Handbook
Installation Handbook
Commissioning Handbook
CT Operators Handbook
CDROM containing the above cited handbooks.

Their P/Ns are not indicated here, as they depend on the Product release and Software Package version.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 86 / 96

96
12.2 General on Alcatel Customer Documentation

This paragraph describes in general the Alcatel Customer Documentation system, details the association
between the product levels and the associated documentation, and explains Customer Documentation
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

characteristics as well as the policies for its delivery and updating.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

This paragraph is fully applicable to the 2nd generation Radio Product families of Alcatel WTD (Wireless
Transmission Division) only.

The documentation typical contents described in para.12.2.3 on page 90, apply to handbooks issued after
February 2002.

12.2.1 CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation

a) Definition

Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as


plantindependent and is always independent of any Customization.

Plantdependent and/or Customized documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to


commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned

N.B. Plantdependent and Customized documentation is not described here.

b) Aims of standard Customer Documentation

Standard system, hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel
the possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating, and
maintaining the equipment according to Alcatel Laboratory design and Installation Dept. choices. In
particular:

the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation
of the manmachine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it;

maintenance is described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.

N.B. No supply to Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and
production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is
envisaged.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 87 / 96

96
12.2.2 Product levels and associated Customer Documentation

See Fig. 24. on page 89.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


a) Products

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
A product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole
of performances and services that it is meant for.
E.g. 9600USY is a product (STM1/0 Urban Digital Radio Link).

b) Product-releases
A product evolves through successive product-releases, which are the real products marketed
for their delivery at a certain product-release availability date. A certain product-release performs
more functionalities than the previous one.
E.g. 9600USY Rel.1.0 and 9600USY Rel.2.0 are two successive product-releases of the same
product.
A productrelease comprehends a set of hardware components and at least one Software
Package (SWP); as a whole, they identify the possible network applications and the equipment
performances that the specific product-release has been designed, engineered, and marketed for.

c) Configurations and Network Elements


In some cases, a product-release includes different possible configurations which are
distinguished from one another by different Network Element (NE) types and, from the
management point of view, by different SWPs.
E.g. 9600USY Rel.1.0 includes various configurations with various NE types (Regenerator
1+0/1+1/2+0 with NE types UHR/UHRC; Regenerator 3+1/4+0 with NE type UHRN; WMSN with
NE types UHR/UHRC/UHM/UHMC) each of which has its own specific SWP.

d) SWP Releases and Versions

See Fig. 23. herebelow.


A SWP is identified by the configuration name and by the version number (tree digits).
The versions first digit corresponds to the productrelease number first digit; the second digit
identifies, together with the first, the SWP release.
The third digit of the SWP version identifies the Patch Level of the SWP Release.

SWP version

SWP Release

Product Patch Level


Releases
first digit

1. 0. 7
SWP evolution for bug fixing purposes
(same SWP Release within same ProductRelease) 1. 0. 9

SWP evolution for additional features 1. 0. 7


(new SWP Release within same ProductRelease)
(N.B. see next page) 1. 1. 2

1. 0. 7
SWP evolution for additional features
(new SWP Release of a new ProductRelease) 2. 0. 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 23. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 88 / 96

96
N.B. Sometimes, different SWP Releases (within the same ProductRelease) are commercially
distinguished by different names, e.g. :

SWP version SWPRelease commercial name


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

1.0.x 1.0
1.1.x 1.0B
1.2.x 1.0C

e) Customer Documentation

A product-release(configuration) has its own set of standard Customer Documentation, usually


formed of several handbooks, i.e., in general:

System and Hardware documentation:


one (or more) Technical Handbook(s) (see page 90 for details)
an Installation Handbook
a Commissioning Handbook or LineUp Guide

Software documentation:
a Craft Terminal Operators Handbook, associated to the specific SWPRelease (see
page 91 for details)
other Operators Handbooks (typically those associated to the SW platform embedded
in the SWP)

PRODUCT

evolution
PRODUCTRELEASE 1.0 PRODUCTRELEASE 2.0

ALTERNATIVE CONFIGURATIONS

CONFIG.A CONFIG.B

evolution
PRODUCT SWP REL.1.0 SWP REL.1.1
LEVELS

DOCUMENTATION

CONFIG.A SWP REL.1.0 SWP REL.1.1


System & HW SW SW
Documentation Documentation Documentation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 24. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 89 / 96

96
12.2.3 Typical contents of Technical & Craft Terminal Operators Handbooks

a) Technical Handbook
It is usually composed by a main handbook and enclosed documents. Information is divided into

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


the following levels (not necessarily in this sequence):

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
MAIN HANDBOOK:

GENERAL INFORMATION

Documentation Guide : contains general information on the Customer Documentation


set envisaged for the equipment and detailed information regarding the specific
handbook, like handbook structure/history and abbreviation list.

SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling : describes the equipment labelling


and the norms mandatory or suggested that must be considered to avoid injuries on
persons and/or damage to the equipment.

INFORMATIVE LEVEL

System Description : gives the firstlevel description of equipment in the specific


configuration the handbook is meant for. The information given is enough to understand
the equipment composition and operation and to read the operative level chapters.

Functional Description : gives the secondlevel description of equipment in the specific


configuration the handbook is meant for. Reading this chapter is not necessary to carry
out standard installation commissioning and maintenance activities.

Technical Specifications : supplies in detail the equipment technical characteristics.

OPERATIVE LEVEL

Physical Configuration : gives detailed operative information regarding:


the equipments items (P/Ns, equipping rules, labels for remote inventory)
their physical and logical position in the system
the unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description
of the access points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons)
hardware setting description
pinout description of connectors for Customer usage
summary and operative information on characteristics of external interfaces

Station Layouts (where applicable) : lists and describes the most common of all the
available system configurations envisaged for the specific configuration the handbook is
meant for. For each configuration a station layout (with cable interconnection diagram) and
a simple system block diagram are present.

Maintenance : describes the equipment routine and corrective maintenance procedures


as well as those for the unit replacement with spare parts.

Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : lists the enclosed documents having
P/N different from that of the handbook (they can be used also as annexes to other
handbooks) and describes how to use the Hardware Setting Documents enclosed.

ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS : Hardware Setting Documents and other documents for specific
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

purposes (typical examples: ODU repair procedures, branching detailed configurations and
drawings, etc.)

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 90 / 96

96
b) Craft Terminal Operators Handbook
It is usually composed by various sections. Each section is an independent document that can evolve
independently from the others. The sections always present are:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION containing the following main parts (not necessarily in this
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

sequence):

Documentation Guide and SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling, as


Technical Handbook

SWP description : lists and describes the Software Packages the Handbook refers to.

Installation : describes in detail the operations necessary for the SWP installation and
upgrading (ECT parts and equipment parts).

ECTequipment remote connections : gives instructions to allow the remote connection


between ECT and the equipment.

SECTION 2: NE MANAGEMENT : gives the description of the menu structure and of all the NE
functionalities available in the Craft Terminal. This section is organized in several chapters
grouped according to the following general scheme:

General information

Equipment configuration management

Setting of parameters for maintenance

Events Log and Performance Monitoring management

Software management

SECTION 3: NE MAINTENANCE : gives the description of the NE troubleshooting based on


the use of the Craft Terminal.

Depending on the SWP contents, other sections can be present in the handbook, to describe other
specific applications or features.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 91 / 96

96
12.2.4 Documentation on paper

a) Handbook format

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Handbooks are supplied on A4sized papers for text and general drawings, and, when necessary,

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
A3sized papers for detailed drawings, in four ring solid/plasticcovered binders.

b) Handbook languages

Handbook standard language is English. As far as handbooks supplied in other languages,


translation is relevant to the text and the drawings within the text.

With regard to Operators Handbooks containing screen prints of the software applications, the
screens included are in the language envisaged by the applicative software supplied to the Customer
(e.g. an Operators Handbook translated in Russian has the screens in English if the user interface
is not in Russian).

Engineering documentation (like selected sheets of unit schematics and component layout given
only as hardware presetting documentation) is bilingual ItalianEnglish.

c) Handbook identification

Each handbook is identified by:

the name of the product-release,

the name of the configuration, if more than one is envisaged within the product-release,

the first two digits of the SWPversion as far as Operators Handbook is concerned,

the handbook name,

the handbook part number,

the handbook edition:


first draft edition=01A
second draft edition=01B
.....
first validated edition=01
second validated edition=02
nnth validated edition=nn

the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of printing, but
to the date on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for production.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 92 / 96

96
d) Handbook updating

The documentation is maintained updated according to the technical changes of the product it refers
to, provided that these technical changes does really impact Customer Documentation (e.g.:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

generally, bugfixing releases do not impact the Operators Handbook). Updating of handbooks,
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

when necessary, is done synchronously with the products industrial technical change, in due time
for having the new product version and the handbooks associated new edition available at the same
time.

1) Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)

In case of handbook updating for its technical contents:

the edition, hence the date, is increased;

the sections/chapters modified with respect to the previous edition are listed in a suitable
Handbook History Table in the Handbook Guide section;

a specific note in the same section sumsup the reasons for the change;

in the affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text
and drawings (this is done after the first officially released and validated version).

NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS

Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operators Handbooks)


are not modified unless the new SWP version distributed to Customers implies
manmachine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the
understanding of the explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the SWP
version marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent
version if the screen contents are unchanged.

2) Changes due to a new product-release

A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01. In this case,
the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 93 / 96

96
12.2.5 Documentation on CDROM

a) Contents

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


A CustomerDocumentation CDROM is conceived to contain in readonly electronic format the

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
handbooks of all the product-release(configurations) of one productrelease.
The first edition of a CDROM is created only when all the handbooks of the first released
product-releaseconfiguration of one productrelease have been issued as first validated editions.
If envisaged, the handbooks relevant to other product-releaseconfigurations of the same
productrelease are added in a further CDROM edition, when they are all completed and validated.
No additional information is added to each handbook, so that the documentation present in the
CDROM is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper (with the same handbook
editions).

b) Standards

CDROMs are generated according to ISO 9660 norms.


A master CDROM is obtained as follows:
each source document is converted into .pdf format by Adobe Acrobat Distiller 4.0;
bookmarks are generated for complex documents in order to make the navigation inside the
documents easier;
some hyperlinks, which make the navigation through the various handbooks easier, are
manually added. The following hyperlinks are standard:
from the INDEX document toward each individual file contained in the CDROM
from section Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes of each Technical Handbook,
toward each specific document listed in the section itself (these documents could be
collected in a separate file).
The files processed in this way are then transferred on a PC where a master CDROM is recorded.
Suitable checks are made in order to have a virusfree product.
The CDROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments or any other environment for which
a suitable Reader has been envisaged by Adobe.
In order to open correctly the pdf files contained in the CDROM, the use of Acrobat Reader Version
4.0 at least is mandatory.
The CDROM does not contain the Acrobat Reader program. Getting it and installing it on the
Customer specific platform is on Customers charge.

c) CDROM identification

Each CDROM is identified:

1) by the following external identifiers, that are printed both on the booklet and the CDROM upper
surface:
the name of the productrelease,
a writing indicating the language(s),
the CDROM P/N (Factory P/N and ANV P/N),
the CDROM edition (first edition=01)

2) and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose
collection and processing the CDROM itself has been created.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 94 / 96

96
d) CDROM updating

The list of source handbook/document P/Nseditions indicated in previous para.c ) point 2 ), in


association with the CDROMs own P/Nedition, is also loaded in the AlcatelInformationSystem
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

as a structured list.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released in the Alcatel archive
system, the AlcatelInformationSystem automatically rises a warning toward the Customer
Documentation department, indicating the list of CDROMs that must be updated to include the new
editions of these handbooks/documents.

This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CDROM.

Updating of CDROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks
composing the collection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 95 / 96

96
12.2.6 Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers

a) Standard supply

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Handbooks and CDROMs are standard commercial items and are ordered and delivered as any

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
other Alcatel commercial item.
Handbooks and CDROMs are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer
to.
The number of handbooks or CDROMs per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.

b) Productdocumentation consistency

Equipment description and layout are always general, i.e. they never describe the actual
composition of the equipment supplied to Customer (this task is entrusted to plantdependent
documentation).
Detailed hardware documentation concerns actually supplied units and is coherent with the
production issue of such units.
Softwareassociated handbooks are coherent with the supplied SWP release.
Copies of the handbooks regarding a specific productrelease previously delivered can be required
specifying P/N and edition.

c) Inadvance supply

Whenever handbooks or CDROMs are delivered before the relevant equipment delivery, there is
the risk that their contents might not agree with the characteristics of the equipment which will be
delivered: the more they are in advance the less are they likely to agree.

d) Supplying updated handbooks and CDROMs to Customers

Supplying updated handbooks or CDROMs to Customers who have already received previous
issues is subject to commercial criteria.
By updated handbook delivery, we mean the supply of a complete copy of a new issue of the
handbook (supplying erratacorrige sheets is not envisaged).

e) Copyright notification

The technical information of the handbooks and CDROMs supplied to Customers is the property
of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.

f) Supply to Customers of Customer Documentation source files

Presently not envisaged.

END OF DOCUMENT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.1:INTRODUCTION

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 96 / 96

96
9600LSY REL.1.0 C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

1 DOCUMENT GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.1.1 Document scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.1.2 Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.2 Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.2.1 Acronyms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.2.2 Glossary of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.3 Document structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.4 Document history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.4.1 List of the editions and modified parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2 GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15


2.1 LHR view organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2 Introduction to the LHR menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2.1 Views menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.2 Configuration menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.2.3 Diagnosis menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.2.4 Supervision menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.2.5 Download menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.2.6 Radio menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2.7 Equipment menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.2.8 Board menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.2.9 Port menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.2.10 External Points menu introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.2.11 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

3 NE MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.1 NE management states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.2 NE supervision and login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

4 NE MANAGEMENT GENERAL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29


4.1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.1.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.1.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state . . . . . . . . 30

04 020715 updated A.FUMAGALLI ITACO C.NAVA ITACO


E.CORRADINI
03 020524 updated A.FUMAGALLI ITACO C.NAVA ITACO
E.CORRADINI
01A 011109 proposaldraft A.FUMAGALLI ITACO M.CORBETTA ITACO
E.CORRADINI
ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

9600LSY REL.1.0
SWP REG.9600LSY R1.0
C.T. OPERATORS HANDBOOK

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 1 / 258

258
4.2 NE Time management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.3 Set Manager list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

5 COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


5.1 Overview on Communication and Routing Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
5.1.1 Partitioning into Routing Subdomains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.1.2 Partitioning into separate Routing Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5.2 Communication and routing views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5.3 Local Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
5.4 OS Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
5.5 NTP Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5.6 LAPD Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.7 Ethernet Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.8 Reachable Address Prefixes Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.9 Manual ES Adjacencies table Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

6 EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6.1 Introduction and navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6.1.1 Equipment configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6.2 Set and change or remove board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.3 Board administrative state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.3.1 Setting a board in service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.3.2 Setting a board out of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.3.3 Consulting a Boards Administrative state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.4 Software description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
6.5 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.5.1 Remote Inventory Subrack Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.5.2 Remote Inventory Board Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
6.6 Show supporting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

7 BOARD VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.2 Board View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.2.1 Port Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.2.2 Show Supporting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

8 PORT VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8.2 Port View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
8.2.1 Physical Media option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
8.2.2 Optical Laser Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
8.2.3 Automatic Laser Shutdown Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
8.2.4 BER Not Intrusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

9 RADIO PROTECTION MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101


9.1 Overall RPS structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
9.1.1 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
9.1.2 Information on RPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
9.1.3 RPS Configure Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
9.1.4 RPS Configure Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
9.1.5 RPS Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

9.1.6 Static Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109


9.1.7 RPS Synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
9.1.8 RPS Extra Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 2 / 258

258
10 WAY SIDE TRAFFIC AND SERVICE CHANNELS PROTECTION MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . 115
10.1 Overall structure of WST and Service Channels protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
10.1.1 Information on WST and Service Channels protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
10.2 RFCOH Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

10.3 RFCOH Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

10.4 RFCOH Synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

11 RADIO PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125


11.1 ATPC/Power and Threshold Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
11.2 ATPC Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
11.3 Power Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
11.4 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
11.5 Power Setting in Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
11.6 ATPC Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
11.7 Gain Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
11.8 HOP Section Trace Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
11.9 Squelch Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
11.10 Radio Abnormal Condition List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
11.11 Frequency Reuse Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
11.12 Equalization Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
11.13 Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
11.14 V.C.O. State Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
11.15 Power Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
11.15.1 Power Measurement Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
11.16 Power Measurement File Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

12 OVERHEAD MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151


12.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12.2 OH Connection overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12.3 Overhead views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
12.4 OH TP creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
12.5 OH Cross Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
12.5.1 Cross-Connection Management dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
12.5.2 Main Cross-Connection dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
12.5.3 Search OH TP dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
12.6 OH TP deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
12.7 OH Phone Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
12.8 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

13 LOOPBACK MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167


13.1 Types of Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.2 Caution: recoverable and unrecoverable loopbacks (with RECT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
13.3 Loopback management starting from Port view menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
13.3.1 Port Loopback Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
13.3.2 Loopbacks Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
13.3.3 Loopback Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
13.4 Loopback management starting from Equipment view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
13.4.1 Loopback Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
13.4.2 Loopback Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

14 EXTERNAL INPUT AND OUTPUT POINT MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

14.1 Displaying external points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183


14.1.1 Expanding or reducing the External Points list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
14.2 External Point configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 3 / 258

258
15 ALARMS MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
15.1 Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
15.1.1 Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP) management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
15.1.2 Allow/Inhibit Alarm Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


15.2 Alarms surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
15.3 Abnormal Condition List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

16 EVENT LOG MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

17 PERFORMANCE MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199


17.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
17.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
17.1.2 Supported Performance Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
17.1.3 Granularity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
17.1.4 Data Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
17.1.5 Thresholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
17.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
17.3 Display Current Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
17.4 Display History Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
17.5 PM Threshold Table Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
17.6 PM Threshold Table Modification or Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
17.6.1 Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
17.6.2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

18 SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215


18.1 General and descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
18.1.1 Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
18.1.2 Software Management functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
18.2 Software Download Manager menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
18.3 Init download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
18.4 Units information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
18.5 MIB management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
18.6 Restart NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

19 SYSTEM SOFTWARE OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225


19.1 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
19.2 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
19.3 Channels and relation between boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
19.4 Functional partitioning of the management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
19.5 Equipment management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
19.5.1 Base band shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
19.5.2 Fans shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
19.5.3 Transceiver shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
19.5.4 Physical Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
19.5.5 Allowed and default equipment configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
19.5.6 Equipment protection management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
19.5.7 Compatible boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
19.5.8 Power Supply Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
19.5.9 External Points management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
19.5.10 Remote Inventory data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
19.6 Transmission management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

19.7 Radio management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249


19.8 Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
19.9 Radio Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
19.10 Overhead management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 4 / 258

258
19.10.1 RSOH bytes terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
19.10.2 RFCOH bytes terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
19.10.3 RSOHRFCOH bytes crossconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
19.10.4 Phonic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

19.11 Radio Overhead management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

19.12 Connection management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257


19.13 Software management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
19.14 Communication and Routing management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
19.15 Security management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
19.16 Support management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
19.17 Test management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 5 / 258

258
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

FIGURES

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Fig. 1. LHR Main view organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 2. NE LHR Main view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Fig. 3. Configuration of the Craft access state from the Equipment NE view in the OS mode. . . . . 29
Fig. 4. Getting and/or setting the local NE time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Fig. 5. NE Time dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Fig. 6. Set Manager List dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Fig. 7. Local Configuration dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 8. OS Configuration dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Fig. 9. NTP Server Configuration dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fig. 10. LAPD Configuration dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Fig. 11. Ethernet Configuration dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fig. 12. RAP Configuration dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fig. 13. MESA Configuration dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Fig. 14. Equipment Overview NE level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Fig. 15. Equipment Overview Rack Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Fig. 16. Equipment Overview Subrack level ( example ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Fig. 17. Equipment menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fig. 18. Selecting the Equipment ( Rack ) to display ( Open Object ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fig. 19. Rack screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fig. 20. Base Band screen with the selectable modules view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Fig. 21. SYStem COntroller card ( SYSCO ) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Fig. 22. SERVice card ( SERV ) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fig. 23. Allowed Boards Equipment Types Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fig. 24. MoDemodulator card ( MD 128 1W1 ) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fig. 25. RRA card ( RRA 1W1 ) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Fig. 26. Selectable modules view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fig. 27. Board view MD 128 1W1 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Fig. 28. Board view RRA 1 ( Electrical Interface ) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Fig. 29. SDH Port view Electrical Interface ( RRA ) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Fig. 30. PDH Port view ( RRA ) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Fig. 31. Selectable Optical STM1 module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Fig. 32. Board view Optical module STM1 ( IS11 ) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fig. 33. SDH Port view Optical Interface ( Optical module STM1 ) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Fig. 34. Board view SERV screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Fig. 35. PDH Port view ( SERVICE ) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fig. 36. Power Supply Filter ( PSF 12 ) Board screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fig. 37. Subrack Transceiver ( SRTRI 1 ) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Fig. 38. Transceiver card ( TRI 128 ) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fig. 39. Board view ( TRI 128 ) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Fig. 40. SDH Board view ( Rx ) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Fig. 41. SDH Port view Rad_S ( Rx ) screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fig. 42. SRFANS Subrack Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fig. 43. Fans card Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fig. 44. List of different boards relevant to an NE slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fig. 45. Example of boards change with a Lock representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Fig. 46. Getting a boards administrative state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fig. 47. Software Description dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 48. Remote Inventory screen at Subrack Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79


Fig. 49. Update Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Fig. 50. Remote Inventory Output Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 6 / 258

258
Fig. 51. Remote Inventory (file saved) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Fig. 52. Remote Inventory screen at Board Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Fig. 53. Equipment Overview Subrack level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fig. 54. An example of a Board view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Fig. 55. An example of Port identification and alarm synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 56. Board menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85


Fig. 57. After Port Access selection ( example ) of LHR N.E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Fig. 58. Subrack level view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fig. 59. Port view SDH ( on the left ) and PDH ( on the right ) option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Fig. 60. LAPD Configuration option menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fig. 61. LAPD Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Fig. 62. Visualizing a port optical parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 63. Automatic Laser Shutdown Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fig. 64. Automatic Laser Shutdown Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Fig. 65. ALS current state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Fig. 66. Ber Not Intrusive window (Start button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Fig. 67. BER Not Intrusive window (Refresh/Stop button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fig. 68. BER Not Intrusive window (Overflow condition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Fig. 69. Refresh option offered by the PORT menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Fig. 70. RPS Configure (Schema) option offered by the RADIO menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Fig. 71. RPS Configure Schema Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Fig. 72. RPS Configure (Units) option offered by the RADIO menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Fig. 73. RPS Configure Units Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Fig. 74. RPS Switch option offered by the RADIO menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Fig. 75. RPS Commands Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Fig. 76. Static Delay option offered by the RADIO menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Fig. 77. Static Delay Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Fig. 78. Row Selected Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Fig. 79. RPS Synthesis option offered by the Radio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Fig. 80. RPS Synthesis dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Fig. 81. RPS Extra Traffic screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fig. 82. RPS Extra Traffic dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fig. 83. RFCOH Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Fig. 84. RFCOH Configure Dialog Box (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Fig. 85. Search RFCOH Protection Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Fig. 86. RFCOH Configure with WST parameters (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fig. 87. RFCOH Configure with Service Channels parameters (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Fig. 88. RFCOH Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Fig. 89. RFCOH Switch Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Fig. 90. RFCOH Synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Fig. 91. RFCOH Synthesis Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Fig. 92. Search RFCOH Protection Schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Fig. 93. RFCOH Synthesis Dialog Box (with parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Fig. 94. ATPC option offered by the RADIO menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Fig. 95. ATPC Management screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Fig. 96. ATPC Configure screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Fig. 97. Power Setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Fig. 98. Manual Power Setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fig. 99. ATPC Identifier option offered by the Radio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Fig. 100. ATPC Single Direction Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 101. Gain option offered by the RADIO menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132


Fig. 102. Channel Radio Port Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Fig. 103. Gain Management Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Fig. 104. Hop Trace option offered by the Radio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 7 / 258

258
Fig. 105. Hop Trace Management screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Fig. 106. Squelch option offered by the Radio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Fig. 107. Squelch Management Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Fig. 108. Radio Abnormal Condition List option offered by the Radio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Fig. 109. Radio Abnormal Condition List Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 110. Frequency Reuse option offered by the Radio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Fig. 111. Frequency Reuse Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Fig. 112. Equalization Delay option offered by the Radio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Fig. 113. Equalization Delay screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Fig. 114. Frequency Agility option offered by the Radio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Fig. 115. Frequency screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Fig. 116. Voltage Control Oscillator option offered by Radio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Fig. 117. Voltage Control Oscillator screen (only read) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Fig. 118. Power Measurement option offered by the RADIO menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Fig. 119. Power Measurement Parameters screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Fig. 120. Power Measurement Graphic Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Fig. 121. Details Dialog screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Fig. 122. Power Measurements File Reading option offered by Radio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Fig. 123. Name of File ( Log File ) selected screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Fig. 124. Example of Power Measurement File Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Fig. 125. Overhead options offered by the Configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Fig. 126. OH TP creation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Fig. 127. Search OH Tp to be created Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Fig. 128. OH TP insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Fig. 129. CrossConnection Management dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Fig. 130. CrossConnection Management dialogue box ( After Search ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Fig. 131. Main CrossConnection dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Fig. 132. Search for OverHead CrossConnection Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fig. 133. Selection of Search OH Tp Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Fig. 134. OH TP deleting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Fig. 135. OH TP delete (selection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Fig. 136. Phone Parameters screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Fig. 137. Print to Printer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Fig. 138. Print to File Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Fig. 139. Loopback A: RRA line loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Fig. 140. Loopback B: RRA internal loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Fig. 141. Loopback C: RFCOH Internal loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Fig. 142. DCC structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fig. 143. EC position with respect to loopback points and consequent unavailability by RECT
(CHx/y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Fig. 144. Allowed and not allowed loopbacks by RECT (CHx/y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Fig. 145. Port Loopback Configuration option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Fig. 146. Port Loopbacks Configuration Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Fig. 147. Loopback Create (Loopback on RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Fig. 148. Loopback Create Dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Fig. 149. Loopback Create Choose Tp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Fig. 150. Loopback Create Tp search screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Fig. 151. Loopback Create Tp selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Fig. 152. Loopback Create Loopbacks selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Fig. 153. Loopback Create (see RST block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 154. Loopback Delete Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177


Fig. 155. Loopback Management Delete TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Fig. 156. Loopback Management (Configuration menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Fig. 157. Loopback Management Dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 8 / 258

258
Fig. 158. Loopback Configuration Dialog Box (Port level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Fig. 159. Loopback Management Search Termination Point (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Fig. 160. Loopback Management Termination Point selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Fig. 161. Loopback Management Termination Point List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Fig. 162. Loopback Management (Configuration Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 163. Loopback Management Delete Termination Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182


Fig. 164. Opening the External Points view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Fig. 165. External Points view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Fig. 166. Expanding or reducing the External Points list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Fig. 167. Configuring external points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Fig. 168. External Input Point Configuration dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Fig. 169. External Output Point Configuration dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Fig. 170. External Points view with flag symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Fig. 171. Configuring the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile (ASAP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fig. 172. ASAPs Management dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Fig. 173. ASAP Edition dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Fig. 174. Set ASAP dialogue box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Fig. 175. Inhibit alarm notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Fig. 176. Allow alarm notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Fig. 177. N.E. Alarms option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Fig. 178. Alarm Surveillance screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Fig. 179. Abnormal Condition List menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Fig. 180. Abnormal Condition List screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Fig. 181. Log Browsing option in the Network Element context view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Fig. 182. An example to access to the Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Fig. 183. PM Configuration dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Fig. 184. Current PM Data dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Fig. 185. PM History Data dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Fig. 186. PM Threshold Table Select dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Fig. 187. PM Threshold Table Modify dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Fig. 188. Software Download general principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Fig. 189. Equipment view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Fig. 190. Download menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Fig. 191. SW downloading initiate dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Fig. 192. Software download in progress dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Fig. 193. Software packages information dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Fig. 194. Software units details window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Fig. 195. Software packages information window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Fig. 196. NE MIB management dialogue box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Fig. 197. Restart NE confirmation box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Fig. 198. Radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Fig. 199. Base Band shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Fig. 200. STM1 access module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Fig. 201. Transceiver shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Fig. 202. SDH and Radio Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Fig. 203. Radio functional block diagram for LHR NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Fig. 204. Details of Radio Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Fig. 205. Overhead management functional view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Fig. 206. Overhead containment and connection relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 9 / 258

258
TABLES
Tab. 1. Document history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Tab. 2. LHR N.E. Composition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Tab. 3. Termination Bytes for the RSOH OverHead related to the SERVICE card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Tab. 4. Termination Bytes for the RSOH OverHead related to the TPHDEV module . . . . . . . . . . . 151

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Tab. 5. Termination Bytes for the RFCOH OverHead related to the SERVICE card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Tab. 6. Termination Bytes for the RFCOH OverHead related to the TPHDEV module . . . . . . . . . . 152
Tab. 7. RSOHRFCOH Bytes crossconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Tab. 8. Maximum Performance Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Tab. 9. N+0/N+1 Base Band shelves slots configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Tab. 10. N+0/N+1 Base Band slots configuration shelf type dependent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Tab. 11. Base Band 1+1 shelf slots configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Tab. 12. N+1/N+0 Transceiver shelves slots configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Tab. 13. N+1/N+0 Transceiver slots configuration shelf type dependent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Tab. 14. 1+1 Transceiver shelves slots configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Tab. 15. 1+1 Transceiver slots configuration shelf type dependent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Tab. 16. Fan shelf slot configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Tab. 17. 1:N RPS protection type parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Tab. 18. 1+1 RPS protection type parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Tab. 19. Radio channels role for WST and Service Channels protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 10 / 258

258
1 DOCUMENT GUIDE

1.1 Scope
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

1.1.1 Document scope

In the following pages the description of the menu structure and of all the functionalities available in the
LHR Version 1.0 of the Craft Terminal is given.

1.1.2 Target audience

This document is intended for all users.

The documents that should be read before starting this document are:

9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0&2.0 Technical Handbook

1320CT Basic Operators Handbook

The sections of this Handbook that should be read before starting this document are:

SECTION 1: Introduction

1.2 Terminology

1.2.1 Acronyms and abbreviations

Refer to the Section Handbook Guide.

1.2.2 Glossary of terms

Refer to the Section Handbook Guide.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 11 / 258

258
1.3 Document structure

Information in this document is organized as follows:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


GENERAL INFORMATION

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Chapter 1 Document guide (this chapter)
It contains general information on this document, like document scope, structure and history.

Chapter 2 General introduction on views and menus


This chapter describes the organization of the LHR N.E., presented after the NE login.

Chapter 3 NE management supervision


This chapter is dedicated to the N.E. states and N.E. access.

EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT

Chapter 4 NE management general configuration


This chapter describes the configuration relevant to the general equipment management (Craft
Terminal access, N.E. Time, etc. ).

Chapter 5 Communication and Routing management


This chapter describes how to set the configuration parameters concerning the communication
protocols for the local N.E., the OS and each other related N.E. in order to provide global
communication capabilities inside the network.

Chapter 6 Equipment management


This chapter deals with the presentation of the N.E. and the structure of the hierarchical tree,
and the types of boards and subracks that comprise the LHR Network Element.

Chapter 7 Board view


This chapter describes the Board View function, allowing to show the physical port available in
a specific board and to access the Port view.

Chapter 8 Port view


This chapter describes the operations necessary for the configuration setting and verification
of each port.

Chapter 9 Radio protection management


This chapter deals with the management of the Radio protections.

Chapter 10 Way Side Traffic and Service Channels Protection Management


This chapter deals with the management of the Way Side Traffic and Service Channels
Protection.

Chapter 11 Radio parameters


This chapter deals with the management of the Radio transmission features.

Chapter 12 Overhead management


This chapter describes how to manage the Overhead ( OH ) bytes of the N.E.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 12 / 258

258
SETTING OF PARAMETERS FOR MAINTENANCE

Chapter 13 Loopback management


This chapter describes the commands for the management of loopbacks, for commissioning
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

or maintenance purposes.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Chapter 14 External input and output point management


This chapter describes how to display and set the input/output environmental alarms
(housekeeping alarms).

Chapter 15 Alarms management


This chapter describes how to configure the Alarms Management and access the Alarm
Surveillance and show the alarm condition.
N.B. The chapter does not describe the Alarm Surveillance system. Reference must be
done to the specific 1330AS Operators Handbook.

EVENTS LOG AND PERFORMANCE MONITORING MANAGEMENT

Chapter 16 Event Log Manager


This chapter describes how to access the Event Log file.
N.B. The chapter does not describe the Event Log Manager. Reference must be done to
the specific ELM Operators Handbook.

Chapter 17 Performance Monitoring


This chapter deals with the use of the Performance Monitoring functionalities.

SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT

Chapter 18 Software Management


This chapter deals with the management of the functions related to the software
verification/download and to the backup and restore of equipment configuration data. The
basic principles of these management functions are explained in section 1 (Introduction) of this
handbook.

APPENDICES

Chapter 19 System Software overview


This chapter presents the system from the management software point of view.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 13 / 258

258
1.4 Document history
1.4.1 List of the editions and modified parts

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


The first and the two most recent editions of the document are indicated in the table of contents. Changes

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
with respect to the previous edition are pointed out by revision bars.

The following Tab. 1. indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.

Legend
n = new part
m = modified part
blank = part unchanged

Tab. 1. Document history


01 02 03 04 05
DOCUMENT EDITION
1 Document guide n m m m
2 General introduction on views and menus n m m m
3 NE management supervision n m
4 NE management general configuration n m m
5 Communication and Routing management n
6 Equipment management n m m m
7 Board view n m m m
8 Port view n m m m


9 Radio protection management n m m


10 Way Side Traffic and Service Channels Protection Management n m
11 Radio parameters n m m m
12 Overhead management n m m
13 Loopback management n m m
14 External input and output point management n
15 Alarms management n m
16 Event Log Manager n
17 Performance Monitoring n m m m


18 Software Management n


19 System Software overview n
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 14 / 258

258
2 GENERAL INTRODUCTION ON VIEWS AND MENUS

This chapter describes the organization of the LHR N.E., presented after the NE login.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

First the view organization is introduced, then the accessible menu options are listed.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

At the end, some further advices are given for Navigation principles.

2.1 LHR view organization

The LHR view ( see Fig. 1. on page 16 ) contains the following fields, which provide you with the
information needed to manage the NE:

Severity alarm synthesis,


Domain alarm synthesis,
Management status control panel,
View title,
View area,
Message/state area.

The Menu bar and the View area contained in the same NE view permit to perform all configuration and
supervision operations and the display the specific selected item.

The view organization is detailed in the Basic Craft Terminal Operator Handbook to which refer for the
description.
This document only comprises the information on the fields that differ according to the NE type:

Domain alarm synthesis


The different alarm domain types in to which the NE can be subdivided are: External Point,
Equipment, Transmission.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 15 / 258

258
Severity alarms Domain alarm synthesis
synthesis
Menu bar

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
View title

View area

Message/state
area
Management
state control panel

Fig. 1. LHR Main view organization.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 16 / 258

258
2.2 Introduction to the LHR menu options

The menu bar allows to perform configuration and supervision functions on the Network Element.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

This paragraph lists all menu options and then provides more details on the respective contained entries.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

For each of them the relevant operative function are briefly introduced and it is referred the paragraphs
where they are detailed or the introduction to the options of each menu inserted in next paragraphs of this
chapter.

From Chapter 3 on page 27 details and operating information on all views are given. They are not
presented according to the menu option sequence, but according to a functional subdivision.

In the menu bar, a number of permanent menu items are always displayed. Starting from the left, the
menus are:

Permanent Menus

Views (first column). See para.2.2.1 on page 19 .

To navigate among the views and to set the TMN parameters.

Configuration (second column). See para.2.2.2 on page 20 .

To set the general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters
(performance monitoring, OverHead parameters).

Diagnosis (third column). See para.2.2.3 on page 21 .

To get information on the NE (alarms, performance monitoring, remote inventory).

Supervision (fourth column). See para.2.2.4 on page 22 .

To set the supervision states (i.e. Craft Terminal enabling).

Download (fifth column). See para. 2.2.5 on page 22 .

To manage the NE software (download, MIB management).

Radio See para. 2.2.6 on page 23.

To show information about the functions and features of the radio Equipment (ATPC, Switch ,
Gain ).

Help (last column).

To activate the help.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 17 / 258

258
The menu bar also comprises other menus, presented as an alternative, only when a specific object or
option is selected.

Other Menus

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Equipment See para. 2.2.7 on page 24

To manage the NE as a whole by setting the boards which compose it. From the Equipment view
the Board view can be accessed.

Board See para. 2.2.8 on page 24 .

To show the physical port available in a specific board. It is the entry point for the Port view.

Port See para 2.2.9 on page 25.

To set and show (detailed alarm view) the transmission resources referred to the Port.

External Points See para. 2.2.10 on page 26 .

To show and modify the housekeeping (environmental) alarms.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 18 / 258

258
2.2.1 Views menu introduction

The menu on the left side of the screen, allows to navigate among the views and to set some parameters
( see Fig. 18. on page 53 ), by means of the following entries:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Backward: Displays the previous screen of the same application.

Forward: Displays the next screen of the same application.

Equipment: Opens the Equipment view.


Then the Equipment menu is available on the menu bar.

External Points: Displays and sets the input/output environmental alarm.

Refresh: Allows to show a complete overview of Equipment.

Open Object: Allows to navigates and shows the contents of the selected object: the current
view changes.
It is equivalent to a double click on the selected object in the view area.

Open in Window: Allows to navigates and shows the contents of the selected object.
The current view doesnt change, but a new windows opened with a new view.

Close: Close the EMLUSM view, without stopping the supervision of the NE.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 19 / 258

258
2.2.2 Configuration menu introduction

This menu allows to set the general configuration of the NE and to show or modify some parameters, by
means of the following entries:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Alarm Severities: Manages the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile.

Set Alarm severities: Sends the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile to the selected boards.

Set SdhNe Alarm severities: Sends the Alarm Severity Assignment Profile to the equipment level.

NE Time: Displays and set the NE local time.

Performance: Manages the Performance Monitoring domain.


Used to set the PM parameters, opening the following menu options:
Threshold table

Loopback Management: Manages the allowed Loopback types ( internal or line ).

Comm/Routing: Enters the Communication and Routing management.


Used to set the parameters for NE and OS in the TMN, opening the following
menu options:
Local configuration
OS Configuration
NTP Server Configuration
Interfaces Config. =>LAPD Configuration
=>Ethernet Configuration
OSI Routing Config.=>RAP Configuration
=>MESA Configuration

Overhead: Handles the operation on the Overhead bytes


Used to set the parameters in the following menu options:
OH Cross Connection
OH Phone Parameters
OH Tp Creation
OH Tp Deleting
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 20 / 258

258
2.2.3 Diagnosis menu introduction

This menu allows to get information on the NE, by means of the following entries:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Alarms: Displays the Alarms Surveillance information of the NE.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

See para. 15.2 on page 194.


Opens the following menu options:
NE alarms
Object alarms
Subtree alarms
Equipment alarms
Transmission alarms
External Points alarms

Performance data: Not implemented

Log Browsing: Manages the events stored in the NE.


Opens the following menu options:
( logld.1 )
( logld.2 )

View Remote Inventory: Displays the remote inventory data, previously stored in the Craft Terminal
by means the upload remote inventory performed in the Supervisory
menu.

Abnormal Condition List: Displays the list of the object class and the name of the boards that are in
the abnormal condition.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 21 / 258

258
2.2.4 Supervision menu introduction

This menu allows to set the supervision states of the NE, by means of the following entries:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Access State: Manages the supervision access to the NE, via CT or OS.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Opens the following menu options:
OS
Requested

Alarms: Manages the alarm supervision of the NE.


Opens the following menu options:
Resynchronize
Allow Notifs
Inhibit Notifs

Upload Remote Inventory:Stores the Remote Inventory data in the Craft Terminal.

Set Manager List: Not implemented yet.

Restart NE: Reset the NE software.

2.2.5 Download menu introduction

This menu allows to manage the NE software, by means of the following entries:

Initial download: Manages the software download,and upgrades the NE.

Units info: Show the status of the software package installed in the NE memory banks.

Mib management Used to back up the NE software configuration and restore of backupped file.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 22 / 258

258
2.2.6 Radio menu introduction

This menu is used to protect the STM1/subSTM1 signals by means the manage the NE software and
of the following entries:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

RPS: Displays the Radio features of the LHR NE.


Opens the following menu options:
Configure =>Schema
=>Units
Static Delay => Rx Side
Switch
Synthesis
Extra Traffic

RFCOH: Displays the Radio features of the LHR NE.


Opens the following menu options:
Configure
Switch
Synthesis

Frequency: This function displays the TX/RX frequency values of a N.E. station.

Power Measurement: The purpose of this function is to set the power measurement in a Link of
N.E.
Opens the following menu options:
Graphic Power Measurement
File Reading

ATPC: This function allows the operator other to enable or disable the ATPC function
( Automatic Transmit Power Control ) of the equipment, also to modify the TX
power level.
Opens the following menu options:
Power and Threshold Setting
ATPC Identifier

Squelch: Displays the possible Squelch actions ( Main, Diversity and Reused ).

Gain: Set the Gain levels on the Receiver side in manual mode.

Hop Trace: This function allows the operator to verify one hop section trace of Equipment.

Radio Abnormal Condition List: Displays the list of operation manual in Tx and Rx sections.

Frequency Reuse: Displays what is the Associated Channel ( Main/Reused ) in Frequency Reuse
case.

Equalization Delay: This function allows the operator to make the Equalization Delay measures.

Voltage Control Oscillator Status: This function displays the Equipment V.C.O. domain.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 23 / 258

258
2.2.7 Equipment menu introduction

This menu allows to manage the NE as a whole, and to set the boards that compose it, by means of the
following entries:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Set: Adds or changes the board type.

Modify: Changes the board type without previously remove it.

Remove: Removes the board.

Set in service: Inserts a lock symbol in the board.

Set out of service Deletes the lock symbol in the board, enabling changes.

Reset: Not implemented yet.

Software description: Shows information on the software of the board.

Remote Inventory: Shows the Remote Inventory data inserted in the equipment.
Opens the following menu options:
Subrack level
Board level

Show supporting equipment: Allows to navigates to the upper equipment level.

Show Supported Port: Allows to navigates to the Subracks/Boards/Ports level of Equipment.

2.2.8 Board menu introduction

This menu allows to show the physical port available in a specific board (alarm synthesis and port symbol)
and to access the port view, by means of the following entries:

Port Access: Access the Port view. See para.7.2.1 on page 86.

Change Physical Interface .Not implemented

Show supporting equipment: Allows to navigate to the upper subrack level. See para.7.2.2 on
page 87.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 24 / 258

258
2.2.9 Port menu introduction

This menu allows to set and show the transmission resources (TP) referred to the Port, by means of the
entries indicated in the following list.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The Port view is reached by means of the Equipment menu and Board view to check the detailed
alarms presented, but the available menu permits to configure the port .
In these views only the TPs specific to the port are presented.

The Port view is presented when, a TP is selected and than confirmed .

TP configuration: Set the parameters for the Section Trace.

AU4 Concatenation: Not implemented yet. Only for SDH port views.

Performance: Set and show Performance Monitoring parameters and data.


See chapter 17 on page 199.
It opens the following menu options:
Configure Monitoring
Display Current Data
Display History Data

Loopback: Allows to manage the Loopback Commands.

Port Loopback Configuration


Loopback Management

Physical Media: Manages the physical setting of the TP of the ports.


See para.8.2 on page 90.
Opens the following menu options:
ALS Management
Show Optical Configuration
TX Quality Configuration
Single Fiber Configuration
LAPD Configuration
MS Configuration

Show supporting board: Allows to navigate to the upper board level.

Refresh: Allows to show a complete overview on the signal flow, opening all TPs

Ber Not Intrusive: Allows to start/stop BER measurement data and to display them
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 25 / 258

258
2.2.10 External Points menu introduction

This menu allows to display and set the input/output environmental alarm (housekeeping alarm), by
means of the following entries:

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Configuration: Set the input/output housekeeping alarms.
See para. 14.2 on page 186. As default nothing is set.

Display: Shows the list of the input/output housekeeping alarms.


See para. 14.1 on page 183.
Opens the following menu options:
Show external Input Points
Show external Output Points
Show all external Points

2.2.11 Help

Not implemented
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 26 / 258

258
3 NE MANAGEMENT SUPERVISION

This chapter is dedicated to the NE states and NE access.


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

3.1 NE management states

The elementary building blocks of any telecommunication network are called Network Elements (NEs).

When operating with a Craft Terminal, the NE can present different management states according to the
condition of the connection (supervision, local access, connection state, etc.). Also general Alarm states
are presented.
Management states are present at the Network Element Synthesis view level and at the LHR view level.
All information relevant to the management states are included in the Basic Craft Terminal Operators
Handbook.
Any message in the communication link between the CT and the NE results in updating of the management
states when the CT detects the communication failure.

3.2 NE supervision and login

The Network Element Synthesis views enable to get access to the current view described in this handbook.

The Network Element Synthesis views enable to work on local or remote NE LHR, selecting them and
activating Supervision and Login, as described in the Basic Craft Terminal Operators Handbook.

The LHR Main views are shown in the following figures ( see Fig. 2. on page 28 ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 27 / 258

258
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT
Fig. 2. NE LHR Main view

258
3DB 02838 AA AA
28 / 258
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
4 NE MANAGEMENT GENERAL CONFIGURATION

This chapter describes the general configuration relevant to the equipment management (Craft Terminal
access, NE Time, etc.).
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

4.1 Access state (allow or inhibit NE Craft access)

The NE can be managed by the OS or by the Craft Terminal. To control the competition of the OS and the
CT, a Local Access Control (LAC) is available.
If the LAC is access denied, it means the OS manages the NE and the CT is not allowed to modify the
NE configuration (it can only read). In the view, the icon with a key symbol has a circular shape.
If the LAC is granted, it means the CT is allowed to manage the NE. In the view, the icon with a key symbol
has a rectangular shape.
If the LAC is requested, it means the CT has requested a permission from the OS and is waiting for a
replay.
However, the OS does continue to provide a certain number of services. These services include:

Alarm reception and processing,


Performance processing on TPs,
Switching back to the OS access state.

The access state of an NE can be modified from two types of views:

4.1.1 Switching from the OS to the Craft Terminal access state

Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then select the Requested option from the Access State
cascading menu as shown in the following figure.

Fig. 3. Configuration of the Craft access state from the Equipment NE view in the OS mode.

From the confirmation dialogue box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the Craft access operation
using the Yes or No pushbutton. The request is sent up to the OS which accepts or refuses it.
If the OS doesnt answer in a predefined time, it is assumed that the NE is in the Craft access state
and can be managed by a Craft Terminal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 29 / 258

258
4.1.2 Switching from the Craft Terminal access state back to the OS access state

Select the Supervision pull down menu. Then the Access State cascading menu in Fig. 3. on page
29, select the OS... option from.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


From the confirmation dialogue box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the OS access operation.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
The NE is now managed by the OS.

N.B. The key symbol icon on the management states of the NE view indicates whether the NE is
managed by a craft terminal or by the OS.

N.B. Local Craft Terminal access is denied on recovery phase after a loss of communication of the
NE. When the communication with the NE is lost, the OS automatically recovers the
communication and forces the state existing before the loss of communication (therefore, Craft
Terminal access can be denied or granted).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 30 / 258

258
4.2 NE Time management

The NE local time of a selected NE can be displayed and/or realigned to the OS time basis.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

From the Configuration pull down menu,Select the NE Time... option


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 4. Getting and/or setting the local NE time.

The following dialogue box opens, from which you can get and/or set the local NE time.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 5. NE Time dialogue box.

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 31 / 258

258
The NE Time dialogue box displays the current date and time of the OS and the NE.

If the Network time Protocol (NTP) protocol is not supported, the NTP Protocol enabled message is
greyed.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
In this case, the Set NE Time With OS Time message is not greyed and the user can set the NE Time
manually.

If the NTP protocol is supported, then the NTP Protocol enabled message is not greyed and two different
operating conditions can be defined:

NTP protocol enabled (in the NTP Server Configuration option at para 5.5 on page 41):
In this case, the Set NE Time With OS Time message is greyed and the user cannot set the NE Time
manually.

NTP protocol not enabled (in the NTP Server Configuration option at para 5.5 on page 41):
In this case, the Set NE Time With OS Time message is not greyed and the user can set the NE Time
manually.

If you do not want to set the NE local time, click the Close pushbutton to close the dialogue box.

To realign the NE time to the OS time basis, click the Set NE Time With OS Time radio button and either
click the Apply pushbutton to validate or the Close pushbutton to cancel and close the dialogue box. The
OS time comes from the workstation date configuration, which corresponds to the standard GMT time.

N.B. The OS system realigns the time of all supervised NEs periodically and automatically with a
configured periodicity. This periodicity is common to all NEs.
If you set the NE time, you will force the change, with an immediate effect on the NE. However
it will not have any effect on the periodic and automatic mechanism.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 32 / 258

258
4.3 Set Manager list

This option is referred to Security management and allows the user to set the Manager List and the Access
Control Domain of the NE.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

From the Supervision pull down menu, select the Set Manager List option.

The dialogue box contains the following fields:

Manager List: each manager connected to the NE is highlighted in the list. The user can set a
manager clicking on the denomination.
Several managers can be enabled simultaneously, having the NE in charge.
The Manager List contains the list of the managers ( i.e. RM, SY, EML) that work on the NE. The LHR
Administrator (SH. or Craft Terminal) should set the Manager List only to remove a manager in case
of emergency (i.e. the Manager misses the NE connection).

NE Domain: this field allows to select a domain among that displayed in the list and to assign it to
the NE.
The different domains could be assigned to different operators.

OK button is used to validate the selection made.

Cancel button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.

Help button provides some useful information on the dialogue.

Fig. 6. Set Manager List dialogue box


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 33 / 258

258
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

258
3DB 02838 AA AA
34 / 258
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
5 COMMUNICATION AND ROUTING MANAGEMENT

5.1 Overview on Communication and Routing Domain


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The purpose of the communication and routing domain is to set the configuration parameters concerning
the communication protocols for the local NE, the OS and each other related NE in order to provide global
communication capabilities inside the network.

A brief description Follows of basic concepts and terms involved in the communication and routing
domain.

During the TMN design process, a network is partitioned into domains; each domain can consist of a
collection of two types of nodes:

nodes supporting the ISIS link state routing protocol; these nodes will be called adaptive
routers; the ISIS protocol floods the network with link state information in order to build a
complete consistent picture of the network topology. Using the ISIS routing protocol in a TMN
facilitates installation and operation, thanks to the self learning and automatic network
reconfiguration capabilities of these protocols in case of failure; moreover, the use of these
standardized routing protocols guarantees interoperability in a multivendor environment.
nodes not supporting these protocols; these nodes will be called static routers.

Networks partitions consisting of the former type of node will be called adaptive routing domains;
networks partitions consisting of the later type of node will be called static routing domains.

Moreover, a node that has to take routing decisions must be able to become an Intermediate Systems,
all others can be made End Systems

5.1.1 Partitioning into Routing Subdomains

In order to reduce the overhead associated with a distributed adaptive routing, it may be useful to subdivide
an adaptive routing domain into smaller routing subdomains, called areas or level 1 subdomain. A level
1 subdomain should fulfil the following requirements:

a level 1 subdomain should form a connected subnetwork; this subnetwork should have only
a few links to the outside world as compared with the number of internal links;
each node must belong to exactly one level 1 subdomain;
each node that is connected to a foreign level 1 subdomain must become a level 2
intermediate system; level 1 intermediate systems only know how to communicate with IS
in the same area; obviously, there must be at least one level 2 intermediate system per level
1 subdomain;
level 2 intermediate systems must form a connected network, because level 1 paths cannot be
utilized for level 2 communications. Such a network will be called level 2 backbone.

In the simplest case, all nodes within a level 1 subdomain share the same area address. In general, it is
allowed to have multiple synonymous area addresses within a level 1 subdomain. The synonymous list
is used to ease partitioning in the future. There is a basic rule, which must be followed by two neighboring
level 1 intermediate systems within a subdomain: there must be at least one area address in common
between their two synonymous lists, otherwise they are not able to communicate with each other.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 35 / 258

258
5.1.2 Partitioning into separate Routing Domains

In certain situations, it might be convenient to partition a given network into separate routing domains,
where no routing information is exchanged between these domains. The major benefits of this partitioning

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


are: reduction of memory, processing and traffic overhead, because there is no exchange of routing

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
information between the domains. Communication between separate routing domains must be achieved
through the use of Reachable Address Prefixes (RAP).
A Reachable Address Prefixes represents a static routing information unit. It can only be associated with
a link of a level 2 intermediate system, whereby this link crosses routing domain boundaries. A Reachable
Address Prefixes is handled in the same way as an information a foreign level 1 subdomain within its own
domain. A Reachable Address Prefixes indicates that any packet whose destination network address
NSAP matches the prefix may be forwarded via the link that the prefix is associated.

For example, let us consider a network which is split into two separate routing domains:
routing domain A resides in a level 1 subdomain with area address a
routing domain B resides in a level 1 subdomain with area address b

In order to enable the communication, the Reachable Address Prefixes in routing domain A must contain
area address b and the Reachable Address Prefixes in routing domain B must contain area address a.
One of the routing domains, connected through the use of Reachable Address Prefixes, can be a static
routing domain; in such a condition, the communication can be achieved through the use of Manual End
System Adjacencies (MESA).
A prerequisite for the use of Manual End System Adjacencies is that the area addresses of the connected
nodes must be the same; as a consequence, the nodes must belong to the same level 1 subdomain.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 36 / 258

258
5.2 Communication and routing views

The Communication and Routing views allow to perform the following operations:
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Local Configuration: defining the local NE addresses


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

OS Configuration: addressing the main and spare OSs connected to the local NE

NTP Server Configuration: addressing the main and spare NTP servers connected to the
local NE

Interfaces Config. which comprises:

LAPD Configuration: defining the LAPD port parameters for each LAPD channel in
the local NE
Ethernet Configuration: defining the configuration parameters necessary to manage
the local NE providing a LAN Ethernet interface

OSI Routing Config. which comprises:

RAP Configuration: configuring the parameters necessary to address the NE


connected by Reachable Address Prefixes in a domain different
from the one of the local NEs one. This information is stored in
a RAP table.
MESA Configuration: configuring the parameters necessary to address a non SIS
NE in the same domain as the local NEs one. This information
is stored in a MESA table.

To get access in the Configuration pull down menu, as shown in the following figure select the
Comm/Routing option from.

The options are described in next paragraphs.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 37 / 258

258
5.3 Local Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing option and then, from the
cascading menu, the Local Configuration option.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The dialogue box opens ( see Fig. 7. on page 39 ) allows to configure the local address of the NE.

The following fields are present:

a Local Address section contain the following graphical objects:

a Presentation Selector identifies a presentation entity at the location identified by the NSAP
Address. The presented value must not be modified.

a Section Selector identifies a section entity at the location identified by the NSAP Address. The
presented value must not be modified.

a Transport Selector identifies a transport entity at the location identified by the NSAP Address.
The presented value must not be modified.

a Network Service Access Point (NSAP) Address identifies a location in the network. The first
field of the NSAP address, AFI, determines the NSAP format.
The AFI field is 2 characters long (2 hexadecimal digits) and, depending on the its value, the
length of the NSAP address is variable from 16 characters to 40 characters:
the value for AFI 49 identifies the local format of variable length (from 16 characters to 40
characters).
the value for AFI 39 identifies the ISODCC format which is 40 characters long.
the value for AFI 47 identifies the GOSIPV2 format which is 40 characters long.

In all cases the last two fields of the NSAP address are:
System Id: identifies an NE in an area uniquely and is 12 characters long
Network Selector: provides the distinction among the users of the network service and is
2 characters long.

In the view, the NSAP is managed as simple strings of characters without any preformatting
because of the variable format:
a first string, two characters long, which identifies the AFI field
a second string, of variable length, which identifies the remaining NSAP address

a Synonymous Area Addresses section allows to have multiple synonymous area addresses within
a level 1 subdomain. The compilation of the two network addresses is optional and, if they are
inserted, the last two fields, of the mandatory address and of the synonymous addresses System Id
and Network Selector, must be the same.

an Intermediate System section determines whether the local NE acts as a level 1 or as a level 2
intermediate system. Note that a level 2 intermediate system performs the level 1 functions too.

End System section is not available.

Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogue box and closes
it; the dialogue is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.

Cancel button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Help button provides some useful information on the dialogue.

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 38 / 258

258
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT
Fig. 7. Local Configuration dialogue box.

258
3DB 02838 AA AA
39 / 258
5.4 OS Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing option and then, from the
cascading menu, the OS Configuration option.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The dialogue box opens ( see Fig. 8. ) allows to configure the addresses of the Main and Spare OSs
connected to the local NE.

The following fields are present:

Main OS Address section contains the same graphical object as the Local Address section in the
Local Configuration dialogue box.

Spare OS Address section contains the same graphical object as the Local Address section in the
Local Configuration dialogue box.

Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogue box and closes
it; the dialogue is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
Cancel button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.
Help button provides some useful information on the dialogue.

Fig. 8. OS Configuration dialogue box.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 40 / 258

258
5.5 NTP Server Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing option and then, from the
cascading menu, the NTP Server Configuration option.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The dialogue box opens ( see Fig. 9. ) allows to configure the addresses of the Main and Spare NTP
(Network Protocol synchronization Time) Servers connected to the local NE, used for time distribution in
the network.

The following fields are present:

Enabling NTP Protocol section allows to enable or disable the NTP Protocol.

Main NTP Server Address section contains the same graphical object as the Local Address section
in the Local Configuration dialogue box.

Spare NTP Server Address section contains the same graphical object as the Local Address section
in the Local Configuration dialogue box.

If the NTP server is coincident with the OS (same hardware), then the same NSAP address as the OS must
be assigned.

Ok button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the dialogue box and closes
it; the dialogue is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
Cancel button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.
Help button provides some useful information about the dialogue.

Fig. 9. NTP Server Configuration dialogue box.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 41 / 258

258
5.6 LAPD Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing=>Interfaces Configuration
option and then, from the cascading menu, the LAPD Configuration option.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
The dialogue box opens ( see Fig. 10. ) allows to configure a LAPD port for each LAPD channel in the NE.
The view simulates a real notebook; it allows the user to select the pages of the notebook by using the
pointing device (upper part of the figure); each page represents a specific LAPD port of Regeneration
Section and its respective pointing device displays the complete user label of the RS TTP associated with
the port. The display of the view can be required directly by the port view containing the RS functional
blocks; this way, only the LAPD configuration parameters of the selected RS TTP are displayed ( see para
8.2 on page 90 ).

In detail, each page contains the following data:

LAPD Interface field allows to define or remove an LAPD Port on the selected RS TTP.

LAPD Role field indicates the role of a given LAPD Port (User/Network) according the LAPD protocol.
This connection is a must to establish a connection between two NE: one User role with one Network
role must be connected.

Apply button performs a configuration change of the data contained in the selected page.
Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.

Fig. 10. LAPD Configuration dialogue box.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 42 / 258

258
5.7 Ethernet Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing=>Interfaces Configuration
option and then, from the cascading menu, the Ethernet Configuration option.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The dialogue box opens ( see Fig. 11. on page 44 ) allows to define the parameters necessary to manage
an NE and provide a LAN Ethernet interface .

The following fields and data are present:

Ethernet Interface field allows to define or remove a Local Area Network Port for the access to the
Data Communication Network.

MAC Address section allows to display the address of the Network Element in the Ethernet LAN; it
is a readonly field.

OSI Section which comprises:

L2 Only Parameter field indicates if the port can be used for level 2 traffic only, so as to
reducing the traffic through the port...

L1 Default Metric is a not modifiable field, Priority field can be set ( default value for
Ethernet is 64 )

L2 Default Metric is a not modifiable field, Priority field can be set ( default value for
Ethernet is 64 ) .

IP Section which comprises:

IP Address to be assigned to the N.E.

IP Mask relevant to the IP address

Routing Ip Protocol can be only in None state. If OSPF or Both options of Routing
IP Protocol field are selected, also the Associated OSPF Area must be set.

Apply button performs a configuration change of the data.

Close button closes the dialog without changes of the data.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 43 / 258

258
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT
Fig. 11. Ethernet Configuration dialogue box.

258
3DB 02838 AA AA
44 / 258
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
5.8 Reachable Address Prefixes Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing=>OSI Routing Configuration
option and then, from the cascading menu, the RAP option.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The dialogue box opens ( see Fig. 12. ) allows to configure the Reachable Address Prefix table.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Each element of the RAP table allows to link a LAPD port or a LAN port of the local NE to a separate
domain; the separate domain is selected by the address Prefixes. If the addressed element is the OS, then
the LAN port will be used.
The view simulates a real notebook; it allows the user to select the pages of the notebook by using the
pointing device (upper part of the figure); each page represents a specific element of the RAP table and
its respective pointing device displays the element counter.

In detail, each page contains the following data:


Physical Interface button
if the element is empty, displays the none value and allows to select a LAPD port or a LAN
port, which will be used to reach the addressed area.
if the element isnt empty, displays the selected port and allows to change it.
Area Address Prefix section allows the user to address the separate domains. The Area Address
Prefix represents an NSAP address without the System Id and Network Selector fields.
MAC Address section allows to address the elements of a domain to be reached the Ethernet LAN;
this field is managed as a simple strings of 12 digit.

Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete RAP table
and to close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
New button is used to insert a new page.
Delete button is used to delete the selected page.
Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 12. RAP Configuration dialogue box.

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 45 / 258

258
5.9 Manual ES Adjacencies table Configuration

Select the Configuration pull down menu. Select the Comm/Routing=>OSI Routing Configuration
option and then, from the cascading menu, the MESA option.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


The dialogue box opens ( see Fig. 13. ) allows to configure the Manual ES Adjacencies table.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
Each element of the MESA table allows to link a LAPD port or a LAN port of the local NE to an End System
element; the ES element must be in the same area as that of the local NE. If the addressed element is
the OS, then the LAN port will be used.
The view simulates a real notebook; it allows the user to select the pages of the notebook by using the
pointing device (upper part of the figure); each page represents a specific element of the MESA table and
its respective pointing device displays the element counter.

In detail, each page contains the following data:


Physical Interface button
if the element is empty, displays the none value and allows to select a LAPD port or a LAN port,
which will be used to reach the End System element.
if the element isnt empty, displays the selected port and allows to change it.
System Id section represents the System Id of the ES element.
MAC Address section allows to address the elements in the Ethernet LAN; this field is managed as
a simple string of 12 digits.

Apply button is used to perform a configuration change of the data contained in the complete MESA table
and close the view; the view is visible until the end of the operations and a wait cursor is displayed.
New button is used to insert a new page.
Delete button is used to delete the selected page.
Close button closes the dialogue without changing of the data.

Fig. 13. MESA Configuration dialogue box.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 46 / 258

258
6 EQUIPMENT MANAGEMENT

This chapter, describes the main features of the Craft Terminal, referred to the Network Element
management views, obtained by means of EMLUSM. These features constitute the headings of each
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

of the paragraphs below.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

This chapter deals with the presentation of the N.E. and the structure of the hierarchical tree, and the types
of boards and subracks that comprise the LHR Network Element.

6.1 Introduction and navigation

This section mainly deals with setting and changing the boards present on the Equipment and undertaking
board protection operations.

To use the menu options, from the View pull down menu select the Equipment option.

The first level of the Equipment Overview representation will be displayed directly into the current window
( see Fig. 14. on page 47 ).
The Equipment Overview enables a fast navigation through all levels of the equipment hierarchy.
Navigation is done from higher to lower levels.

A navigation through different levels of the NE hierarchy is performed by clicking on object twice:

the first level shows the NE level of the Equipment view ( see Fig. 14. on page 47 );

a double click on it allows to read the rack level of the Equipment view ( see Fig. 15. on page
48 );

a double click on it allows to read the subrack level of the Equipment view ( see Fig. 16. on page
48 ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 14. Equipment Overview NE level

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 47 / 258

258
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT
Fig. 15. Equipment Overview Rack Level

258
Fig. 16. Equipment Overview Subrack level ( example )

3DB 02838 AA AA
48 / 258
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
In the Subrack view ( see Fig. 16. on page 48) it is possible to use the options offered by the Equipment
menu ( see Fig. 17. on page 49 ) by clicking on the menu bar.

Alarms indications are present at the NE level.


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

In the Maintenance section, details are given on this indication.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

All options are described in the next paragraphs, starting from the operation to set and change the boards
present on the Equipment.
The board administrative state that decides the in/out of service of the board is also described.

Fig. 17. Equipment menu

Equipment setting operations are defined according the following sequences:

configuration of a new board


Configure the board by using the Set option

change of a board type


Set out of service the board
Configure the board by using the Set option

removal of a board
Set out of service the board
Remove the board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 49 / 258

258
6.1.1 Equipment configurations

This section provides information on the equipment types configurations of the LHR NE.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


The LHR NE can be equipped up to 8 radio channels:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
N + 1 Configuration ( where N is minor of 8 ). One Channel, among N Main channels (protected),
can be transmitted on the spare channel ( protecting ) by Hitless switch function; moreover, this
Configuration can be used to transmit an Occasional Main channel ( extra traffic) on the Spare
channel.

1 + 1 Configuration. The protected Channel is transmitted on the Spare channel ( protecting )


by Hitless switch function; the extra traffic cannot be supported.

N + 0 (1:n) Configuration ( where N is minor or equal of 8 ). In this case all radio channels are
independent between them and the Hitless switch function is not provide.

In each of the Configuration above, the managed signal can be STM1 or subSTM1.

The LHR NE contains the following Equipment:

Base Band Subrack

Transceiver Subrack

Fans Subracks
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 50 / 258

258
6.1.1.1 Allowed Equipment Configurations

In the following there are a short description and the related screens of the Equipment Composition of LHR
NE.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Tab. 2. LHR N.E. Composition.

COMPOSITION
RACK SUBRACK MODULES LABEL SUBMODULES LABEL
( DENOMINATION ) ( DENOMINATION )
SYSCO ( Slot 1 ) MEMDEV ( Daughter 1 )
(SYStem COntroller card) Memory Device

HKDEV ( Daughter 2 )
( Additional housekeeping)
SERV ( Slot 2 ) CH n SCP ( Daughter 1 )
( SERVice card ) Protected Service
Channel
TPHDEV ( Daughter 2 )
( Additional voice )
RRA ( Slot 3579 IS1.1 ( Daughter 1 )
111315 ( Optical module STM 1 )
17 1921 )
RACKLHR SRBB ( RRA card ) 0 to 9
( Rack ) ( Baseband ) MD ( Slot 46810 IFWCO ( Daughter 1 )
121416 ( IF module )
182022 )
( MoDem card ) 0 to 9 IFWXP ( Daughter 2 )
( IF module )
PSF ( Slot 2536 )

( PSF board ) 12
PSU ( Slot 26 to 35 )

( PSL4860 board ) 0 to 9
RX ( Daughter 3 )
( Receiver module )
SRTR TRI 128 ( Slot 1 to 10 ) RX ( Daughter 4 )
( Transceiver ) ( Transceiver card ) ( Receiver module S. D. )
LO ( Daughter 12 )
( Local Oscillator module )
SRFANS FANSL ( Slot 12 )
( Fan Subrack 3) ( Fan card )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 51 / 258

258
6.1.1.1.1 Base Band

The System Controller card ( SYSCO ) is composed of the function blocks Equipment and Radio
Controller, and the Memory Device module ( MEMDEV ).Then it is composed of the Additional

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


housekeeping module ( HKDEV ) to expand the number of housekeeping, and the external connectors

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
for the QB3 and F Interfaces. The HKDEV is external SYSCO board.

The Service card ( SERV ) is composed of the Additional voice module ( TPHDEV ) for adding a voice
channel. Then it is composed of the Auxiliary Service Channels ( AUX/EOW ) circuit , the protection of the
WST channels, and of the Switch Logic of the RPS protection *( in case of 1+1 and N+1 configurations).

The RRA cards ( RRA 0 to 9 channels ) are connected to the transmission line through one Optical or
Electrical Interface. The Optical Interface is an Optical Module inside to the RRA card ( IS1.1 )( see
Fig. 25. on page 59 ), instead the Electrical Interface is a function block of the RRA card.
The RRA 0 situated in slot 3 of the Base Band Rack , is used as a standby radio channel in N+1 and 1+1
Configurations, otherwise it is used as a main radio channel in N+0 Configuration.

The Modem card ( MD ) is composed of the modulator and demodulator function blocks. In case of Space
Diversity Configuration the Modem card employ an IF module ( IFWCO ). In case of Frequency reuse
Configuration ( XPIC ) is used another IF module ( IFWXP ). The IFWCO and IFWXO can be combined.

The Power Supply Unit boards ( PSL4860 0 to 9 ) power the Base Band Rack. Each PSU board supplies
one Modem card and two RRA card ( for example PSL4860 0 supplies MD 0, RRA 0 and RRA 1,
PSL4860 1 supplies MD 1, RRA 1 and RRA 0).

The Power Supply Filter boards ( PSF 12 are protected ) is composed of the filter section for the PSU
boards, and of DC/DC converter to supply the System Controller and Service cards. The two PSF boards
are in protection between them.

6.1.1.1.2 Transceiver

Every Transceiver card ( TRI 0 to 9 ) is composed of one transmitter function block and of DC/DC
converter module for power supply. Then it is composed of one Receiver module and two Local
Oscillator modules ( one for the receiver side, the second for the transmitter side ).
In case of Space Diversity Configuration the Transceiver card contains a second Receiver module (RX)
( Daughter 4 ) ( see Tab. 2. on page 51 ).

There are two different types of Transceiver card 128 QAM, depending on the output power level:

Transceiver card standard TRI 128

These Transceiver cards are in alternative between them.

6.1.1.1.3 Fans

In the Rack of LHR N.E. are present two Fan Subracks:

The SRFANS 1 ( Fan Subrack 1 ) which provide the necessary ventilation to the possible ADM
Equipment.

The SRFANS 2 ( Fan Subrack 3 ) which provide the necessary ventilation to the LHR Equipment
( Base Band and Transceiver sides ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 52 / 258

258
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 18. Selecting the Equipment ( Rack ) to display ( Open Object )

The screen above allows the operator to select all Equipment levels ( Subracks, Modules, Submodules)
of the LHR N.E. to be displayed.
Select the object (i.e. Subrack)
Selecting the Views option in the menu bar and then click on Open object pull downmenu choice.
Fig. 19. on page 54 shows the selecting of the Base Band Subrack ( SRBB11 ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 53 / 258

258
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 19. Rack screen

Selecting the Views option in the menu bar and then click on Open object ( or by clicking twice over
the Subrack in examen ) the next screen it opens ( in this case SRBB11 see Fig. 20. on page 55 ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 54 / 258

258
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 20. Base Band screen with the selectable modules view

The screen above includes all the selectable modules of the BaseBand Subrack ( SRBBN1 ).
The operator can get access to each of these modules. As example the module corresponding to System
Controller card ( SYSCO ) has been selected.

By clicking twice on the selected module the next screen opens ( see Fig. 21. on page 56 ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 55 / 258

258
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 21. SYStem COntroller card ( SYSCO ) screen

Starting from the Unit screen the operator can get access to all the circuit parts ( Daughters ) consists of.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 56 / 258

258
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT
Fig. 22. SERVice card ( SERV ) screen

Fig. 23. Allowed Boards Equipment Types Screen

258
3DB 02838 AA AA
57 / 258
The screen above allows to configure and modify the Modules/boards according to the equipment.
Para. 6.2 ( Set & Change ) on page 75 includes the procedure to configure and replace a unit (BOARD).

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 24. MoDemodulator card ( MD 128 1W1 ) screen
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 58 / 258

258
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT
Fig. 25. RRA card ( RRA 1W1 ) screen

258
3DB 02838 AA AA
59 / 258
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 26. Selectable modules view

By means the Show Supported Port option from the Equipment menu ( see Fig. 26. on page 60 ),the
operator can get access to the Board view screen ( see Fig. 27. on page 61, Fig. 28. on page 62 and
Fig. 34. on page 67 ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 60 / 258

258
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 27. Board view MD 128 1W1 Screen

The screen above shows an example of SDH Board ( in this case is the SDH Board MoDem card ).Clicking
twice on the square in the high left position, the SDH Port view screen it opens ( see also Fig. 40. on page
72 for the Radio section ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 61 / 258

258
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 28. Board view RRA 1 ( Electrical Interface ) screen

Clicking twice on the below square in the left of the screen, the SDH Port view screen it opens ( see
Fig. 29. on page 63 ).

In the same way in the upper square, the PDH Port view screen it opens ( see Fig. 30. on page 63 ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 62 / 258

258
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT
Fig. 30. PDH Port view ( RRA ) screen

258
3DB 02838 AA AA
Fig. 29. SDH Port view Electrical Interface ( RRA ) screen

63 / 258
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 31. Selectable Optical STM1 module view

Starting of the RRA card view ( see Fig. 31. on page 64 ), by means the Show Supporting Port option
from Equipment menu ,the Board view of Optical module STM1 ( IS11 ) screen it opens ( see Fig. 32. on
page 65 ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 64 / 258

258
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

258
3DB 02838 AA AA
Fig. 32. Board view Optical module STM1 ( IS11 ) screen

65 / 258
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

258
3DB 02838 AA AA
Fig. 33. SDH Port view Optical Interface ( Optical module STM1 ) screen

66 / 258
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 34. Board view SERV screen

The screen above shows the external connector ( Auxiliary Service Channels ) relatives to the SERVice
card.

Clicking twice on the connectors symbol ( AUX ), the PDH Port view screen it opens ( see Fig. 35. on
page 68 ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 67 / 258

258
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 35. PDH Port view ( SERVICE ) screen

The screen above shows the Plesiochronous Physical Interface with the relevant alarms ( LOS and URU,
refer to Chapter Maintenance ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 68 / 258

258
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 36. Power Supply Filter ( PSF 12 ) Board screen

When an equipment unit has no Terminal Points, inside the relevant screen appears the writing This board
does not contain physical TP ( refer as example Fig. 36. on page 69 and Fig. 43. on page 74 ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 69 / 258

258
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 37. Subrack Transceiver ( SRTRI 1 ) screen

The screen above shows the Subrack SRTRI with two transceiver. Clicking twice one of the two
transceivers checked with the padlock symbol the screen it opens ( see Fig. 38. on page 71 ).

Clicking twice one of the two transceivers checked with the padlock symbol the screen it open (see
Fig. 38. on page 71).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 70 / 258

258
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 38. Transceiver card ( TRI 128 ) screen

In the screen above the operator can select the Four modules which the Transceiver is composed:

Receiver module 128 QAM ( Daughter 3 ).

Receiver module 128 QAM Space Diversity ( Daughter 4 ).

Local Oscillator module ( Daughter 1 ) related to the Rx side.

Local Oscillator module ( Daughter 2 ) related to the Tx side.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 71 / 258

258
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT
Fig. 39. Board view ( TRI 128 ) screen

Fig. 40. SDH Board view ( Rx ) screen

258
3DB 02838 AA AA
72 / 258
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT
Fig. 42. SRFANS Subrack Screen
Fig. 41. SDH Port view Rad_S ( Rx ) screen

258
3DB 02838 AA AA
73 / 258
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT
Fig. 43. Fans card Screen

258
3DB 02838 AA AA
74 / 258
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
6.2 Set and change or remove board

The boards can be set, changed, or removed by using the menu options of the Equipment view.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

a) Setting or changing a board


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

A new board may be created in either an empty slot or in replacement of an existing board that is Out of
Service ( without the lock symbol ).
Click the empty slot in which a board has to be added, or an existing board Out of Service in order
to change it ( see next para. 6.3 on page 77 for in/out of service info ).The outline becomes
highlighted to show that operations can be done on it.
In the Equipment pull down menu of Fig. 17. on page 49, Select the Set option.

The following figure shows an example of a dialogue box containing a list of the different types of
boards.

Fig. 44. List of different boards relevant to an NE slot

N.B. The list of boards displayed during a Change Board operation is restricted to those the
equipment may accept in the selected slot. Therefore the list will vary depending on which slot
has been selected.
For details on the boards identified by the acronyms and on the NE physical composition, refer
to the Technical Handbook.

Choose the board type required by clicking on the corresponding item in the list. The name of the
board is highlighted. Click the OK pushbutton to validate the choice made.

The board representation appears in the NE view in the slot when the board change is effective.
A lock representation appears over the board ( see Fig. 45. on page 76 ).

In the Set Board dialogue box, the Cancel pushbutton cancels the operation and closes the dialogue
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

box. The Help pushbutton opens a Help view which provides information on the context.

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 75 / 258

258
b) Removing a board

Click the board to by removed ( Out of Service board, see next para. 6.3 on page 77 ).
The outline of the slot becomes highlighted. This indicates that the board is selected and that

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


operations can be done on the slot.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
If the slot you are working on is already empty, no name appears below it.

In the Equipment pull down menu of Fig. 17. on page 49, Select the Remove option.

From the confirmation dialogue box that opens, you can confirm or cancel the Remove Board
operation.

c) Modify a board

N.B. This procedure can be done to replace an existing board with another type without
previously remove it.

Choose the board type required by clicking on the corresponding item in the list. The name of the
board is highlighted. Click the OK pushbutton to validate the choice made.

Select the Modify option of the Equipment pull down menu.

A dialog box containing a list of different types of modules selectable is displayed.

Choose the board type required by clicking on the corresponding item in the list. The name of the
board is highlighted. Click the OK pushbutton to validate the choice made.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 45. Example of boards change with a Lock representation

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 76 / 258

258
6.3 Board administrative state

The operator can decide whether to set a board in service or out of service, if it is allowed by the NE.
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

N.B. In the Equipment view,a lock representation appears over the boards that are in the in service
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

state.

6.3.1 Setting a board in service

In the Equipment NE view, click on the board in order to select it.


In the Equipment pull down menu of Fig. 17. on page 49, select the Set in service option
A lock representation appears over the boards.

6.3.2 Setting a board out of service

In the Equipment NE view, click the board in order to select it.


In the Equipment pull down menu of Fig. 17. on page 49, select the Set out of service option. In
the confirmation window which appears, select the Ok pushbutton
A lock representation disappears over the boards.

6.3.3 Consulting a Boards Administrative state

The boards administrative (in service or out of service) state is indicated on the Board view as shown
in the following figure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 46. Getting a boards administrative state

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 77 / 258

258
6.4 Software description

This function allows the operator to display information on the software(s) that is(are) present in the selected
board.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Click a board whose software is to be investigated. The outline of the slot becomes highlighted. This
indicates that the board is selected and that operations can be done on the slot.
In the Equipment pull down menu of Fig. 17. on page 49, select the Software description option

The Soft 0 is RC Software and Soft 1 is EC Software.

The following window opens.

Fig. 47. Software Description dialogue box

The dialogue box contains as many folder sheets as the softwares in the selected board.

Click on the Close pushbutton to close the dialogue box.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 78 / 258

258
6.5 Remote Inventory

This command is used to display the remote inventory data present in the NE and in a board.
In the Equipment pull down menu, select the Remote Inventory option
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Two options are available ( see the following figure ):


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Subrack level: Remote Inventory of the board inside Subrack


Board level: shows the remote inventory data for the selected board

6.5.1 Remote Inventory Subrack Level

This command allows to display the remote inventory of the Subrack

In the Equipment pull down menu, select the Remote Inventory => Subrack Level

Fig. 48. Remote Inventory screen at Subrack Level


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 79 / 258

258
A question appears similar of Fig. 49. to that where is possible to update remote inventory subrack or not.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 49. Update Remote Inventory

If its OK is possible to select the Output Destination


Printer Destination
Printer
File (see Fig. 51. on page 80)
Output Format
Postscript
ASCII

Fig. 50. Remote Inventory Output Destination


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 51. Remote Inventory (file saved)

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 80 / 258

258
6.5.2 Remote Inventory Board Level

This command allows to display the remote inventory of the Subrack


not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

In the Equipment pull down menu, select the Remote Inventory => Board Level
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

A dialogue similar to that of Fig. 52. appears.

Fig. 52. Remote Inventory screen at Board Level

In the screen above are stored all the information relatives to an Equipment Board. When it isnt possible
to read the Remote Inventory information a RUTM (Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch) alarm is declared.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 81 / 258

258
6.6 Show supporting equipment

In the Equipment menu, click the Show Supporting Equipment menu option to navigate to the
equipment that supports the selected board.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
A window like that shown in Fig. 53. opens.

Fig. 53. Equipment Overview Subrack level


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 82 / 258

258
7 BOARD VIEW

7.1 Introduction
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

The Board View allows to show the physical port available in a specific board and to access the Port
view.

The Board View is reached starting from a Subrack view and then selecting the Show Supporting
Port option in the Equipment pull down menu ( see previous chapter ).

An example of Board view with the presented port is shown in Fig. 54. on page 83.

At the bottom of the view, the Alarms and Status indications relevant to the board level are present, as
indicated in the example.

This information comprises: the In/Out of service status of the board; the board status like missing
or mismatch ; the EPS condition ( if supported ); and other indications specific to the individual units
( e.g. high laser temperature ).

Details on these indications are given in the Maintenance section.

Fig. 54. An example of a Board view


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 83 / 258

258
A port type is described with a Board rectangular view and a Port identification.

The Port identification is usually internal to the rectangular board ( see Fig. 55. ).

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
Fig. 55. An example of Port identification and alarm synthesis

The following information is provided:

port type (name)


port type (alarm status synthesis)
port symbol

The operator gets a representation of the port alarm synthesis for each port.

The messages displayed on the top view provide the port denomination.

The messages displayed on the bottom provide information on the Board alarms.

A message under the mouse facility provides the port name and type or the alarm name. A message
appears in the message area on the bottom left corner of the view.

By doubleclicking a Board view, it is also possible open its corresponding Port view ( see Fig. 57. on page
86 ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 84 / 258

258
7.2 Board View Menu

By selecting the Board option in the menu bar ( see Fig. 54. on page 83 ), the complete Board pull down
menu is presented ( see Fig. 56. ):
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Port Access: Access the Port view. See para.7.2.1 on page 86 .

Change Physical Interface: Not implemented

Show supporting equipment: Navigate to the upper subrack level.


See para.7.2.2 on page 87.

Fig. 56. Board menu options

These options are described in the next paragraphs.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 85 / 258

258
7.2.1 Port Access

In the Board menu, click the Port Access menu option to access the Port view.

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.


Navigating to the Port view permits to show a detailed alarm presentation of the port and to set its relevant

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
configurations, as shown if the following figure for a typical example.

Fig. 57. After Port Access selection ( example ) of LHR N.E.


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 86 / 258

258
7.2.2 Show Supporting equipment

In the Board menu ( see Fig. 56. on page85 ), click the Show Supporting Equipment option to navigate
to the subrack that supports the selected Port view ( see Fig. 58. on page 87 ).
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

Fig. 58. Subrack level view


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED 04 SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

957.207.022 A 3DB 02838 AA AA 87 / 258

258
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
04

957.207.022 A
SC.2:LHR NE MANAGEMENT

258
3DB 02838 AA AA
88 / 258
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
8 PORT VIEW

8.1 Introduction
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents

This chapter describes the operations necessary for the configuration setting and verification of each port.

The Port View permits to set and show the transmission resources (TP) referred to the specific Port: it
permits to check the detailed alarms presented by each TP of the Port, and the available menu permits
to configure the port.
In these views are presented only the TP specific of the port.

The menu differs according the port type (SDH, PDH).

The Port view is